Electrical Specification

VOLUME-5

SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

ELECTRICAL WORKS

PROPOSED AL TADAWI HOSPITAL,

AT PLOT NO 2140857, AL GARHOUD COMMUNITY/BLOCK, DUBAI

INDEX

SPECIFICATIONS

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL JULY 2014

PART B – ELECTRICAL WORKS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION:

SECTION 1 : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 2 : ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

SECTION 3 : STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR

SECTION 4 : LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 5 : VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

SECTION 6 : MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE

SECTION 7 : POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND

HARMONIC FILTERS

SECTION 8 : CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDERS AND FITTINGS

SECTION 9 : SYSTEM OF WIRING

SECTION 10 : LIGHTING

SECTION 11 : LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 12 : LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

SECTION 13 : EARTHING

SECTION 14 : UPS SYSTEM

SECTION 15 : ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM

SECTION 16 : CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM

SECTION 17 : VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

SECTION 18 : CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM

SECTION 19 : NURSE CALL SYSTEM

SECTION 20 : CENTRAL CLOCK SYSTEM

SECTION 21 : PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM

SECTION 22 : ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM

SECTION 23 : MATV System

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B - SECTION 1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Page 1 of 25

SECTION 1




Page 2 of 25

SECTION 1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS-INDEX

1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS

2.0 GENERAL

3.0 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS

4.0 PERMITS FEES AND INSPECTIONS.

5.0 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

6.0 SHOP DRAWINGS, BUILDERS WORK DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

7.0 RECORD (AS BUILT) DRAWINGS

8.0 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANAULS

9.0 TEMPORARY SERVICE.

10.0 COOPERATION

11.0 EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT

12.0 SUPERVISION.

13.0 CLEANING.

14.0 ACCESSIBILITY, ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS.

15.0 CONTRACTORS DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY

16.0 HIGH VOLTAGE NETWORK

17.0 AUTHORITIES APPROVAL.

18.0 REGULATIONS



Page 3 of 25

19.0 DEFINITIONS

20.0 PHASE IDENTIFICATION

21.0 VOLTAGE DROP

22.0 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INTERFERENCE

23.0 SEGREGATION OF SERVICES

24.0 BUILDER'S WORK

25.0 FOUNDATION BOLTS AND SUPPORTS

26.0 DESIGN AND STANDARDISATION

27.0 MATERIALS, SHOP DRAWINGS AND WORKMANSHIP

28.0 SAMPLES

29.0 STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

30.0 PAINTING (ELECTRICAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT)

31.0 LABELS

32.0 INSPECTION AND TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS - LOCAL

33.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING AT SITE

34.0 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE.

35.0 CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION.

36.0 GUARANTEES.

37.0 MAINTENANCE

38.0 SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS



Page 4 of 25

1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS

The Scope of works includes the supply, delivery to site, installation, commissioning and

testing of the various complete systems outlined briefly below, and as described elsewhere

in the specification documents.

The contractor shall be responsible to visit the site to familiarize himself with the scope of

work and

preparation of shop drawings and obtaining approval from the various authorities prior to

execution of work. The contractor shall also be responsible for obtaining all materials and

workmanship approval during execution and on completion of works including the

connection of permanent power supply and KWH meter. All costs and charges required

by the various authorities shall be included in the scope of work except the power

connection charges which shall be paid by the client.

LV switchboards and all necessary interconnecting cabling and associated earthing

systems.

Soft starters, variable frequency drives.

Motor control centre.

Submain distribution switch gear.

Sub-main distribution cabling including all cable trays, brackets and cleats.

Final sub-circuit wiring including all necessary conduit and trunking.

All general and special purpose power accessories and switchgear.

Standby Generator.

UPS System

Light fittings, switches and all connections for lighting installations.

Lightning protection system, earthing system and harmonic protection.

Central Battery Back up Emergency lighting system

Analogue addressable Fire Alarm system.

CCTV System.

SMATV System.

Voice / Data System.

Lighting Control system.

Access Control system.



Page 5 of 25

Central Clock system.

Public Address / Background Music system.

Nurse Call System

All necessary power supplies terminating in an isolating switch located within 2 meters of

the mechanical equipment/panels.

All coordination with other subtrades to supply and install power supply to the various

equipment including all conduiting and ducts for the installation of the control wires by the

equipment supplier.

Any cost associated with removing existing services of electrical, control system and

telephone system.

1.1 The work shall comprise the whole of the labour and, unless otherwise indicated, all the

materials necessary to form a complete installation and such tests, adjustments and

commissioning as are prescribed in subsequent clauses and as may otherwise be required

to give an effective working installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.0 GENERAL

2.1 This specification is for the Mechanical and Electrical (MEP) works. However, the

Instructions to Tenderers, Form of Tender, Conditions of contract, Note on Pricing,

Preliminaries Section and any Supplementary Conditions of Contract applicable to Main

Contract shall be applicable to this contract also.

2.2 The term Contractor used in the MEP documents and drawings is to be considered to

mean the Contractor for MEP works.

2.3 Contractor shall be responsible for proper performance of all MEP systems in accordance

with relevant standards and codes and design parameters listed hereinafter.

2.4 Provide all items, articles, materials, operations, sundries, labour, supervision, guarantees,

allowances for overhead and profit, etc., to achieve a fully functionable and acceptable

system.

2.5 The precedence of documents and drawings shall be as determined in the Main Contract.

However, consider the specifications as an integral part of the work together with the

drawings. Consider any item or subject omitted from one, but mentioned or reasonably

implied on the other as properly and sufficiently indicated and provide the same under the

work of this division.

2.6 The Contractor is responsible for developing his own take off of materials and is to make

this available as requested to the Consultant.

3.0 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS.



Page 6 of 25

3.1 Visit the site of the proposed works and obtain all information as to existing conditions and

limitations and all proposed works on adjacent sites and in adjacent areas which might

affect the works on this site, whether by Private Individuals or by Government Authorities or

others.

3.2 Examine the documents including the Specifications and Drawings of all other Divisions

before bidding and again before commencing any portion of the works.

3.3 Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for any claim for extra work or

expense resulting from the failure of the Contractor to be fully aware of Site Conditions.

4.0 PERMITS FEES AND INSPECTIONS.

4.1 Arrange for inspection of all work by the Local Authorities as and where applicable. This is

to occur on an on-going basis throughout construction to avoid delays to the project. On

completion of the work, present to the Consultant, for the Owner, final unconditional

approval certificates of the Inspecting Authorities.

4.2 Pay fees/charges as levied by the Local Authorities for inspections, approvals, temporary

services, connections, etc. at no additional cost to contract.

4.3 Before commencing any work on site, submit the shop drawings (approved by the

Consultant) to the Authorities, as and where applicable, for checking and approval. Follow

the progress of such drawings to permit the timely approval of them by the Authorities.

Comply with any changes requested by the Authorities, but notify the Consultant

immediately of any such change and obtain his approval.

5.0 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

5.1 The drawings for services works are design drawings, diagrammatic, and intended to

convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate locations

of apparatus, fixtures, pipe and duct runs, etc. The drawings do not intend to indicate

architectural or structural details.

These cannot be used as shop drawings. Contractor must develop own detailed shop

drawings for work at site.

5.2 Do not scale drawings. Obtain accurate dimensions to structure and architectural items

from drawings of those trades. Confirm by site measurement. Verify location and elevation

of all services (Water, Electrical, Telephone, Sanitary, Storm Drainage, Gas, etc.,) before

proceeding with the work.

5.3 Make at no extra cost, any changes or additions to materials, and/ or equipment

necessary to accommodate structural conditions (pipes or ducts around beams, columns,

etc.)

5.4 Alter, at no additional cost, the location of materials and/ or equipment as directed,

provided that the changes are made before installation and do not necessitate additional

material.

5.5 Install all ceiling mounted components (Diffusers, grilles, detectors, light fixtures, emergency

lights, fire detectors, loudspeakers, camera points, etc.) in accordance with the reflected

ceiling drawings which are to be prepared by the Contractor and coordinated with all



Page 7 of 25

trades. These must be submitted for approval and be approved before any work

commences on site.

5.6 Leave space clear and install all work to accommodate future materials and/or

equipment as indicated and/or supplied by other divisions of work of the contract. Install

all pipe runs, conduit runs, cable trays, etc., to maintain maximum headroom and

clearances, and to conserve space in shafts and ceiling spaces and under floors, and to

provide adequate space for service and maintenance.

5.7 Confirm on the site the exact location of outlets and fixtures.

6.0 SHOP DRAWINGS, BUILDER’S WORK DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

6.1 Within 15 days of award of Contract, submit programme of works. Alongwith the

programme, submit a schedule detailing proposed submission dates for all Material

Submittals, Shop drawings and Builder’s work drawings. Allow 15 days review period by the

Consultant for each submission.

6.2 Contractor must obtain, from the Consultant, approvals of all materials, equipment and

drawings within appropriate time to facilitate work at site, but, within 75 days latest, from

the Contract award date. This period includes any required resubmissions till final approval

is obtained.

6.3 Prepare drawings in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and openings

for all passages through structure and all insert sizes and locations.

6.4 Prepare composite construction drawings, fully dimensioned, of piping and equipment in

tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms and areas, and all other critical locations to

avoid a conflict of trades.

Base equipment drawings upon shop drawings and include but do not necessarily limit to,

all details pertaining to access, cleanouts, tappings, sleeves, electrical connections, drains,

location and elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from consultation with, and

agreement of, all trades involved.

6.5 Prepare drawings of equipment bases, pump pits, anchors, inertia slabs, floor and roof

curbs, wall openings, trenches.

6.6 Prepare all drawings to scale as agreed with the Consultant. Generally, the scale shall be

1:50 for layouts and 1:20 for Details and Sections, etc. Forward these drawings, approved

by all trades concerned to the Consultant for his records. Provide copies in a number as

specified elsewhere in the Contract but not less than four sets.

6.7 Drawings production and presentation is a Contractual matter and any delay in making

these submissions will be considered a Contractual delay and may be subject to

Contractual penalties in accordance with Contract documents.

6.8 The Consultant will only consider shop drawings bearing the stamp of the Contractor and

all Subcontractors involved. Check for all pertinent information such as physical

dimensions, make, performance, electrical characteristics and indicate the intended use

and location before submitting these drawings. Use reference symbols or enumeration to

correspond to the design drawings.



Page 8 of 25

6.9 Assume responsibility for accuracy of equipment dimensions related to space available,

accessibility for maintenance and service, compliance with inspection authorities codes.

Ensure that shop drawings indicate working weights of all equipment.

6.10 The submission of samples, wherever required by Consultant, will be subject to the same

procedure as that of shop drawings. One set of such samples shall be required to be

brought to site and kept there after approval till substantial completion.

6.11 The Consultant will mark the drawings "Approved / Approved with comments / Revise and

Resubmit / Not Approved. Contractor shall resubmit accordingly.

6.12 The Consultant is not responsible for any delays caused by the inadequacy of the

Contractor's drawings or his failure to obtain initial or subsequent approval. Any time taken

by the Contractor to obtain approval after the originally scheduled date will be

considered as a delay to the contract caused by the Contractor.

6.13 The Consultant's review shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations

from the Contract documents, unless he has, in writing, called the Consultant's attention to

such deviations at the time of submission of drawings. The Consultant's approval shall not

relieve the Contractor from the entire responsibility. Any approval by the Consultant shall

be on the understanding that any item submitted shall be ordered with options and

modifications to fully meet the specification. Any fabrication, erection, setting out or other

work done in advance of receipt of stamped drawings shall be done entirely at the

Contractor's risk and cost.

6.14 Furnish prints of the reviewed details to all other parties who may require them for proper

coordination of their work, and furnish all information necessary for the work as a whole.

6.15 Obtain Manufacturers' installation directions to aid in the proper execution of the work.

Submit two copies of such directions to the Consultant prior to installation, for use in

inspecting the work.

7.0 RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS

7.1 As the job progresses mark on one set of prints to accurately indicate the status of installed

work. Have the prints available for inspection at the site at all times. 30 days before

commissioning, finalise the As Built drawings and submit 2 sets as draft to the consultant for

checking and approval. Upon approval, submit one set of transparencies and three sets

of prints to the consultant for onward transmission to the client. Also submit a CD

containing soft copies of all As Built drawings and technical details of all systems and

equipments.

7.2 Show on the record drawings the installed inverts of all services entering and leaving the

building and the property. Dimension underground services at key points of every run in

relation to structure and building. Record all elevations for underground services in relation

to floor level of the building and give reference datums to Municipal benchmarks.

8.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

8.1 Upon successful commissioning, submit one draft of Operation and Maintenance Manuals

for review and approval of Consultant.

Separate binders shall be used as follows :



Page 9 of 25

1. HVAC.

2. Electrical

3. Low Current Systems.

4. Fire alarm system.

5. Central battery system.

6. Plumbing and Drainage.

7. Fire and Safety.

8. Any Services other than above.

8.2 The minimum information required is as follows :

1. Catalogs highlighting the Make, Model and other necessary details for all Material

and Equipment installed.

2. List of Local Agents / Suppliers for all Materials and Equipment with Telephone, Fax

and Email address.

3. Detailed description of systems operation.

4. Procedures for Preventive, regular and the breakdown maintenance, with

Manufacturer’s Operation and Maintenance Catalog for all Systems / Equipments.

5. Commissioning data for all Systems / Equipment.

6. List of recommended spares. (Ensure availability of the spares for at least 7 years).

7. Diagnosis of faults / remedy action guidelines.

8.3 Upon approval of the draft by the Consultant, submit 4 set of manuals to Consultants for

onward submission to the Owner. Atleast one set of the manuals shall contain originals of

catalogues and brochures.

9.0 TEMPORARY SERVICE.

9.1 Do not use any of the permanent service facilities during construction, unless specific

written approval is obtained from the Consultant and the Owner or where specifically

allowed elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

9.2 In the event that mains power is not available or is not of sufficient capacity for

commissioning and testing, supply, install and operate diesel generator(s) of the correct

capacity.

Any generator must have full safety features and must be maintained regularly to ensure

site power at all times.

10.0 COOPERATION

10.1 Confer with all trades installing equipment which may affect the work of this division, and

arrange equipment in proper relation with that equipment installed under all Divisions of

the Contract.

10.2 Furnish all items to be built in by others, in time, complete with all pertinent information,

commensurate with the progress of the work.

10.3 Store materials neatly and out of the way and clean up all refuse caused by the work

daily.

11.0 EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT



Page 10 of 25

Before this Contractor undertakes work in any area he must prepare a list of deficiencies in

that area which affect his works, or which could possibly be construed as being caused by

himself if not noted. In the event that such deficiency list is not prepared, then he shall be

deemed responsible for such deficiencies. Any list shall be brought to the attention of the

Consultant forthwith.

12.0 SUPERVISION.

12.1 The Subcontractor will maintain at site, as necessary for the performance of the Contract,

qualified personnel and supporting staff, with proven experience in erecting, testing, and

adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.

12.2 Before commencing work the Contractor will submit details of the proposed Engineers and

Supervisors, including copies of their Certificates. If in the Consultant's opinion the proposed

Engineers or Supervisors are not adequately qualified or are otherwise unacceptable, the

onus is on the Contractor to submit alternates until such approval is given.

12.3 Where the Contractor's staff becomes during the Contract deficient in performance, the

Contractor is to remedy the situation by immediate and appropriate replacement, to

Consultant’s approval.

12.4 Approval of the Contractor's Engineers or Staff shall in no way prevent the withdrawal of

that approval at any time during the Contract should the Consultant so desire. In the event

of such disapproval, Contractor will be required to rectify the position as stated above

within 14 days.

12.5 In the event of any negligent or severely detrimental behavior the Consultant has the right

to order the removal from site of any Engineer, Supervisor, or worker on a “forthwith" basis.

13.0 CLEANING.

13.1 Each day as the work proceeds and on completion, clean up and remove from the

premises all rubbish, surplus material, equipment, machinery, tools, scaffolds, and other

items used in the performance of the work. Clean out dirt and debris and leave the

buildings broom clean with no stains and in a condition acceptable to the Consultant.

13.2 Where electrical items form part of the visible finish in the rooms, protect from

over-painting, etc. and give all items a final cleaning before handing over of the project.

14.0 ACCESSIBILITY, ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS.

14.1 Any item of equipment requiring maintenance shall be located so as to be accessible for

maintenance or repair without removing adjacent structures, equipment, pipings, ducts or

other materials.

14.2 Install all concealed equipment requiring adjustment or maintenance in locations easily

accessible through access panels or doors. Install systems and components to result in a

minimum number of access panels. Indicate access panels on as-built drawings.

14.3 Provide the respective Division of work with panels, doors or frames, complete with all

pertinent information for installation.



Page 11 of 25

Ensure that access doors are installed in a manner to match the building grids where

applicable.

14.4 Prepare detail drawings showing location and type of all access doors in coordination with

other trades before proceeding with installation and hand these to the Contractor to

obtain approval.

14.5 Size all access doors to provide adequate access and commensurate with the type of

structure and Architectural finish. Should it be necessary for persons to enter, provide a

minimum opening of 600 x 450mm.

14.6 Ensure proper fire rating of access doors in fire separations

14.7 Lay-in type ceiling tiles, if properly marked may serve as access panels.

14.8 The access panels shall be constructed and shall have finishing to match surrounding

architectural construction and finishes and shall be to engineer’s approval or as specified

elsewhere in the contract documents.

15.0 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY

15.1 The appointed Contractor shall accept full functional responsibility for all electrical services

to meet the requirements of the Client/Engineer and generally in accordance with this

specification.

15.2 The Contractors tender submission shall include for all the necessary material, plant,

equipment and systems to meet the Engineer's approval whether specifically mentioned

herein or not.

The scope of work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:-

(a) LV site cabling.

(b) All main and sub-main switchgear with allowance for future extension.

(c) All internal LV and control cabling.

(d) All emergency and escape lighting.

(e) All lighting and lighting control system

(f) All Fire alarm and life safety installations.

(g) All low current system installations.

(h) All telecommunication / data system installations.

(i) All Security & Access control system installations.

(j) Electrical services for mechanical services plant.

15.3 Design Parameters

The electrical system equipment selection and installation shall comply with the particular

requirements listed hereunder:



Page 12 of 25

15.4 Site Conditions

All electrical equipment and components shall be selected and installed such as to

operate satisfactorily and safely under the following climatic conditions.

Maximum shade temperature in summer 50 deg. C

Direct sun temperature in summer 84 deg. C

Minimum ambient temperature in winter 2.8 deg. C

Relative humidity max 100

Rusty atmosphere

15.5 System of Supply

Three phase, neutral and separate protective conductor (TT).

The system of supply shall be at 380V / 400V 3Ph, 50HZ with a maximum short circuit

capacity of 50 KA for 1 second at the main bus bar of the LV Switch Board.

The electrical system shall have following system variations at the sub-station:

Voltage +/- 6%

Frequency +/- 4%

16.0 HIGH VOLTAGE NETWORK

16.1 The contractor shall be responsible for all negotiations with the DEWA to ensure that

supplies are available to meet the construction programme. It shall be the Contractor's

responsibility to execute all civil construction work connected with the HV Distribution

Network as required by DEWA. All costs associated with acquiring permanent incoming

mains supply including all civil works shall be included in the contract except for the power

connection charges which shall be paid by the client.

17.0 AUTHORITIES APPROVAL.

17.1 The contractor shall be responsible for liaising with DEWA, ETISALAT/DU and the Civil

Defence Authority and any other authorities after obtaining the Consultant's approval, in

order to :-

(a) Approve the shop Drawings, before ordering any equipment, and commencing

with the installation.

(b) Approve any excavation prior to installation;

(c) Acquire main supply connection;

(d) Approve the Fire Alarm, Telephone systems etc.

18.0 REGULATIONS

The installation shall be carried out in accordance with the current edition and

supplements of the following Regulations and Standards: -

(a) Statutory Regulations of DEWA.



Page 13 of 25

(b) It is the contractor's responsibility to ensure that the electrical work and installation

meets with the requirements of the relevant authorities and there shall be no

extra cost whatsoever paid by the client due to the requirement of the

authorities.

(c) IEE regulations with latest amendments.

(d) All relevant BS, IEC Standards.

(f) Other appropriate regulations under statute.

(g) Requirements of BS 7671, 1992

19.0 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this Specification:

(1) The definitions given in the IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations apply.

(2) The words "weatherproof" and "dust protecting" shall have the meanings ascribed

to them in the relevant regulations.

(3) The words "complete installation" in clause 1.1 shall mean not only the major items

of plant and apparatus conveyed by the Specification, but all the incidental

sundry components necessary for the complete execution of the works and for the

proper operation of the installation, with their labour charges, whether or not these

sundry components are mentioned in detail in the tender documents issued in

connection with the contract.

20.0 PHASE IDENTIFICATION

The cable connected to phase "R" shall be in all cases coloured Red, the cables

connected to phase 'Y' shall be coloured Yellow, and the cables connected to phase ‘B’

shall be coloured Blue. The neutral conductor shall in all cases be Black. Any insulated

earth wires shall be coloured Green or Green/Yellow. These colours shall be continued up

to the actual terminals or cable lugs.

21.0 VOLTAGE DROP

The voltage drop between the incoming LV switchboard and the extremity of any circuit

shall not exceed 4% of the nominal supply voltage.

22.0 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INTERFERENCE

The whole of the electrical installation work shall be so designed that there is an absolute

minimum of interference with telecommunications, and the reception of broadcasting to

BS 800 or any other relevant BS.

23.0 SEGREGATION OF SERVICES



Page 14 of 25

The armour of all cables, cable trays, trunking, ducts etc., shall be prevented from coming

into contact with non-electrical services by minimum spacing of 150mm. Where this is

impracticable they shall be bonded to the exposed metal of the other service through a

protective conductor.

24.0 BUILDER'S WORK

To reduce the necessity for cutting away and the like, certain holes and chases will be

provided in the structure by the Contractor to the Engineer's instructions.

The Contractor shall plan his work so that full advantage is taken of these provision's but it is

the Contractor's sole responsibility to ensure that all holes and chases are in the required

position and that any additional ducts, holes and chases necessary for the execution of his

work in the in-situ concrete walls, floor slabs, columns and beams are executed in the early

stage of construction of the building.

25.0 FOUNDATION BOLTS AND SUPPORTS

25.1 The Contractor shall arrange for the supply of, in advance of the delivery of the

equipment, all necessary foundation bolts, nuts, plates, sleeves and anchorage’s as and

when directed.

25.2 All cable trays, cable trunkings, light fittings and any other electrical components shall be

installed and supported using a standard product recommended by the manufacturer,

where such support is not a standard product range. The contractor shall only use

galvanized material to engineer's approval as a support.

26.0 DESIGN AND STANDARDISATION

26.1 The Works shall be executed to facilitate inspection, cleaning and repairs for use where

continuity of operation is the first consideration. All equipment supplied shall ensure

satisfactory operation under working conditions. All plant containing rotating parts shall be

capable of operating at speeds up to the maximum duty specified without vibration or

excessive noise.

26.2 Corresponding parts throughout the Contract Works shall be made to gauge and shall be

interchangeable wherever possible. The Contractor may be required by the Engineer to

prove interchangeability by actual interchanging of the various parts.

26.3 Suitable provision by means of eyebolts or other means are to be provided to facilitate

handling of all items that are too heavy or bulky for lifting and carrying by two men (70 kg).

27.0 MATERIALS, SHOP DRAWINGS AND WORKMANSHIP

27.1 The contractor shall be responsible to obtain the Consultant's approval on the detailed

working drawings prior to ordering any equipment and commencing the installation.

27.2 Separate drawings shall be provided for each electrical system.



Page 15 of 25

27.3 The contractor shall be responsible for preparing a dimensional shop drawing showing the

exact location and mounting height of the different components.

27.4 The contractor shall also be responsible for preparing enlarged scale details, sections and

elevations wherever requested by the Engineer.

27.5 If requested by the Engineer, the contractor shall forward coordinated shop drawings

showing the exact locations of all services.

27.6 In addition to the above, the Contractor shall forward schematic diagrams for all system.

The schematic diagram shall include all details requested by the Engineer.

27.7 It is a requirement of the specification that the finished appearance of the plant in public

areas is of a high architectural standard and all panels, covers, trim panels, finishes and

the like shall be included to provide this required appearance to the satisfaction of

the Engineer.

27.8 The whole of the equipment supplied shall be of durable finish and suitable for installation

in a modern building.

27.9 The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the components of each system are

mutually compatible and integrated to form fully efficient systems complying with the

Drawings and specifications.

27.10 All materials shall be, where applicable, in accordance with the IEE, BS Regulations, UL

Specifications, Factories Act and Insurance Company requirements, where such exists,

unless otherwise specified or agreed by the Engineer in writing.

27.11 All articles and materials specified to conform to the Standards shall be clearly and

indelibly marked and stamped with the Standard number specified and other details

required by the regulations, except where marking is impracticable when the relevant

advice/delivery notes shall include the Standard number with which they are to comply.

27.12 All materials and workmanship shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer, particular

attention shall be paid to a neat orderly well arranged installation, carried out in a

methodical competent manner.

The contractor shall be responsible to replace all the unsatisfactory work to the engineer

without any extra cost and to the standard required by the consultant. This also applies to

any item which is found to be defective in service during the maintenance period or

extended maintenance as appropriate.

27.13 No person shall be allowed to execute any type of work which is normally carried out by a

skilled tradesman unless he is thoroughly experienced and proficient in the trade

concerned. The Engineer shall have the option to require a tradesman to demonstrate his

proficiency to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

28.0 SAMPLES

Whenever requested, the Contractor shall provide a sample properly labelled of all

lighting fittings, switches, fittings and other like accessories described in this specification

or as specified by the Engineer.



Page 16 of 25

Such samples shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval at his offices or elsewhere

as directed, with all parts left loose, so that they may be taken apart for internal

inspection by hand without the necessity of using spanners, screw drivers or wrenches.

29.0 STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

29.1 All plant and equipment shall be stored off the ground under weather-proof cover until

ready for incorporation in the works. All electrical apparatus shall be examined and

cleaned before installation. All open conduit ends shall be fitted with plastic caps or

suitable protective covering to prevent the ingress of foreign matter. All drums with cables

shall be protected from direct sunlight.

29.2 Protect the building and structures from damage due to carrying out the work.

29.3 Protect all electrical works from damage. Keep all equipment dry and clean at all times.

29.4 The contractor shall be responsible for and make good any damages caused directly or

indirectly to any walls, floors, wood work, brickwork, finishes, services etc.

30.0 PAINTING (ELECTRICAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT)

30.1 Where it is the usual practice of the manufacturer of items such as electric motors,

switchgear, control panels, and similar equipment, to apply a high standard of

protective paint work in the shop before dispatch, this will be acceptable provided

any damage to paint work on the plant and equipment which occurs is made good

by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The interiors of control panels,

switchboards and switchgear, finish paint (two coats work) shall comply with the

appropriate standard for enamel finish and the exteriors of such panels shall be of an

British Standard colour to give a minimum reflection value of 42%.

30.2 Instruments shall be finished dull black and control handles, push buttons and similar fittings

shall be chromium plated or otherwise specially finished to the approval of the Engineer.

30.3 All items of equipment installed above the intalite suspended ceiling shall be painted with

a matt black finish.

31.0 LABELS

31.1 Identification labels of 'traffolite' or other approved material engraved black on white

both in Arabic and English language unless otherwise agreed, with not less than 5mm

'lino' style letters shall be fixed on or adjacent to all controls, switches and distribution

gear by means of at least two brass screws. Socket outlets of voltage other than 220

volt AC shall be similarly identified or engraved.

31.2 The labels shall bear the identifications shown on the drawings, such as identification,

designation, function and where necessary, phase and voltage.

31.3 Each distribution board shall be complete with a chart protected by transparent plastic

and fixed securely to the inside of the lid indicating details of each circuit controlled by the

board. These details shall contain points of utilization served, number and size of

conductors and type of wiring.



Page 17 of 25

31.4 A permanent warning labels durably marked “Earth Connection Do not Disconnect” shall

be permanently fixed in a visible position near each earthing and bonding connection.

31.5 A mimic diagram shall be provided on each main, submain panel board and on each

motor control centre.

32.0 INSPECTION AND TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS

32.1 The Engineer shall have at all reasonable times access to the Contractor's premises to

inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the plant and equipment during

its manufacture there, and if part of the plant and equipment is being manufactured on

other premises, the Contractor shall obtain for the engineer permission to inspect as if the

plant and equipment was manufactured on the Contractor's own premises. Such

inspection, examination or testing, if made, shall not relieve the Contractor from any

obligation under the Contract.

32.2 All work, materials and the like rejected shall be corrected or replaced as necessary at the

Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

32.3 Where the plant and equipment is a composite unit of several individual places

manufactured in different places, it shall be assembled and tested as one complete

working unit. All equipment will be tested at the maker's works to the relevant standards

where applicable.

32.4 The aforementioned works tests carried out before delivery to the Site shall not in any way

relieve the Contractor of completing satisfactory site tests after erection as specified.

32.5 The contractor shall give the Engineer reasonable notice, at least seven clear days in

writing of the date on and the place at which any plant or equipment will be ready for

testing as provided in the contract and the Engineer shall thereupon at his discretion notify

the contractor of his intention either to release such part of the plant and equipment upon

receipt of the works tests certificates or of his intention to inspect such part of the plant and

equipment and shall then, on giving twenty-four hours notice in writing to the Contractor,

attend at the place so named within seven days of the date by which the contractor has

stated in his notice the said plant and equipment will be ready for testing. The Contractor

shall forward to the Engineer six duly certified copies of the test readings.

32.6 Whether at the premises of the Contractor or of any of his sub-contractors, the Contractor

except where otherwise specified shall provide, free of charge, such labour, materials,

electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably

demanded, to carry out efficiently such tests of the plant and equipment, in accordance

with the contract and shall give facilities to the Engineer to accomplish such testing.

32.7 Works tests shall also be carried out such that due consideration is given to the Site

conditions under which the equipment is required to function. The test certifications shall

give all details of such tests.

32.8 As and when any plant and equipment shall have passed the tests referred to in this clause

the Engineer shall issue to the Contractor a notification to that effect.

32.9 The Contractor shall not pack for delivery or transport to Site any part of the plant or

equipment until he has obtained from the Engineer his written approval to the release of

such part for delivery after any tests required by the Engineer in terms of this clause

have been completed to his satisfaction.



Page 18 of 25

32.10 In particular, inspection and test at the maker’s works will be required for standby

Generator, UPS and Electrical Switchboard.

33.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING AT SITE

33.1 Upon completion of the installation or part of the installation, the Contractor shall carry out

and be responsible for the testing and commissioning all plant, equipment and integral

systems, in stages if required, to ensure that it is in proper working order and capable of

performing all of its functions in accordance with the specification and to the satisfaction

of the Engineer. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all equipment until each item

of plant, equipment or system or part thereof has been tested, commissioned and

accepted by the Engineer.

33.2 Any equipment damaged in commissioning shall be replaced by new plant by the

Contractor at his own expense and the plant, equipment or system concerned shall be

re-tested and commissioned. No instruction or action of the Engineer shall relieve the

Contractor of this responsibility.

33.3 All testing and commissioning shall be carried out according to the requirements of the

relevant Standards and regulations as may be stated or implied in this specification.

Contractor shall prepare proper standard inspections, tests and commissioning forms and

submit for approval by Engineers and Clients.

33.4 The Contractor shall give to the Engineer in writing at least ten days notice of the date

after which he will be ready to make the specified tests on completion of installation.

Unless otherwise agreed the tests shall take place within seven days after the said date on

such day or days as the Engineer shall in writing notify the Contractor. The tests shall as far

as possible be carried out under normal working conditions to the satisfaction of the

Engineer and shall extend over such periods as he may direct.

33.5 If in the opinion of the Engineer the tests are being unduly delayed, he may by notice in

writing call upon the Contractor to make such tests within ten days from the receipt of the

said notice and the Contractor shall make the said tests within the said ten days and notify

the Engineer of the days on which the said tests are to be made. If the Contractor fails to

make such tests within the time aforesaid the Engineer may himself proceed to make the

tests. All tests so made by the Engineer shall be at the risk and expense of the Contractor.

33.6 The Contractor shall provide all skilled labour, supervision, apparatus and instruments

required for commissioning and testing and within a reasonable time thereafter furnish to

the Engineer six certificates of all tests performed and accepted, signed by the Engineer,

the Contractor and an authorized person acting on behalf of DEWA as prescribed in the

appropriate Regulations and Specifications.

33.7 If any part of the plant or equipment fails to pass the specified tests, further tests shall, if

required by the Engineer, be repeated. The Contractor shall, without delay, put in hand

such modifications as are necessary to meet the requirements as described in the

Contract and any expense which the Employer may have incurred by reason of such

further tests may be deducted from the Contract Price.

33.8 The Contractor shall include for submission of working drawings for the electrical installation

to the DEWA for approval and shall allow for the procurement of the DEWA test certificate

upon completion of the building following inspection of the electrical installation by DEWA.



Page 19 of 25

Acceptance shall not in any way absolve the Contractor of his responsibility for the

performance of the plant or equipment after erection as a complete working system in all

respects.

34.0 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE.

34.1 The ultimate condition for system acceptance is that the Owner and Consultant have

inspected the system and found it to be acceptable, and indicated this in writing.

Issuance of the final payment certificate does not necessarily indicate system

acceptance, neither does release of final payment holdback in whole or in part. The

Consultant's acceptance may be contingent on any or all of the following if applicable:

34.1.1 Submit original copies of letters from manufacturers of all systems indicating that their

technical representatives have inspected and tested the respective systems and are

satisfied with the methods of installation, connections and operation.

34.1.2 Submit "as built" drawings and operation and maintenance manuals.

34.1.3 Train owner's maintenance staff.

35.0 CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION.

35.1 Remedy all work in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract during the

Maintenance period.

35.2 Attend immediately to any and all the defects occurring during the period defined above

and repair in a manner to prevent recurrence. This contractor is responsible for all work

required by other trades necessary to repair the works of this section, or necessary to repair

damage caused by the failure of any part of this section.

35.3 Instruct all Suppliers and Manufacturers that guarantees on equipment will commence

when the completed work is accepted and not from the date the equipment is put into

operation. In the event that this condition is omitted by the supplier, or if subsequent cost

to the Owner is involved. Contractor shall be liable for such costs.

36.0 GUARANTEES

36.1 The Contractor will guarantee all material and workmanship for at least 12 months after

preliminary take over by the Owner.

36.2 All guarantees from equipment suppliers will be vested in the Owner, regardless of whether

the Contractor who supplied the equipment is still associated with the project or not.

36.3 Guarantees will be full guarantees and will include all overhead, profit, incidental charges

and sundries.

36.4 Where damage is caused to any other item by any failure of the item guaranteed, then

the guarantee shall also include the costs incurred in rectifying that damage.

37.0 MAINTENANCE.



Page 20 of 25

37.1. Maintenance is defined as the Contractual Liability to maintain the equipment in working

condition, PLUS the regular checks and servicing of equipment during the maintenance

period, including all the consumables and spare parts to keep the equipment in best

working order.

37.2. Regular maintenance shall be as necessary, but in any event not less frequently than

monthly. Breakdown calls shall be attended immediately.

37.3. Maintenance period shall be 1 year from the date of handing over for all Electrical works.

37.4 Proper / satisfactory forms of procedure and schedules of maintenance shall be preared

complying with manufacturer’s recommendations. These forms shall be submitted for

approval by Engineer / Client prior to starting of the maintenance period. Also, a list of

contact persons / parties for attending complaints / emergency around the clock shall be

submitted.



Page 21 of 25

SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS



Page 22 of 25

38.0 SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS

All the materials supplied under this contract shall be from one of the manufacturers listed

below. No alternate Makes shall be accepted unless all the listed Makes are unavailable.

Materials proposed from listed Makes also must fully comply with Detailed Specifications.

Country of Origin, where listed, must be complied.

1. MDBs / SMDBs / DBs / MCCs / Changeover Panel / Isolator

SR. MAKE ENCLOSURE

1. ABB Logstrup

2. Siemens Siemens

3. Schneider Schneider

(Assembled and tested only by the above respective Authorized Local Agent)

2. Cables and Accessories Ducab

Riyad Cables

Oman Cables

Jeddah Cables

3. Cable trays / Ladders Wiremold - UK

Wire Baskets OBO Bettermann – Germany

Wibe – Sweden

Cablofil – France

4. Cable Trunking Barton

Wiremold

MK

OBO Bettermann

5. Heat Resistant Cable (≥ 90 ºC) Tekab

Draka

Riyadh Cables

Ducab

Pirelli



Page 23 of 25

6. Wiring accessories

Make White plastic Slimline metal finish

MK Aspect insignia

MEM Spectra grid Ultra

Legrand Mosaic Synergy modern

Clipsal Mega 2000 Gains Borough

classic

Contactum Grid Flat Plate

7. GI Box Barton

Decoduct

Appleby

Clipsal

Elektra

8. PVC conduits and Accessories Decoduct

Marshall Tufflex

Clipsal

9. G.I. Conduit and fittings Barton

Maruchi

Walsal

WM Interface

10. PVC Coated Flexible GI Conduit Kopex

Adaptaflex

Lappcable

WM Interface

11. Fire Alarm System Simplex - USA

Edwards – Canada

Gent – 34000 - UK

Notifier - USA

Siemens – USA

12. Fire Alarm Cable Pirelli

Firetuff

GST

Cavicell

13. Earthing system, Lightning Furse

Protection System, Electronic A. N. Wallis

Systems Protection, Surge Arrestors Erico

Kingsmill

14. Emergency Lighting System Prazissa - Germany

GFS - Germany

Cooper CEAG – Germany

Enotec - Germany

15. Capacitor Banks Comar

Schneider



Page 24 of 25

ABB

Nokian Capacitors

16. Isolators Moeller

ABB

Schneider

GE

Siemens

17. Structured Cables / Fibre Optic Corning – Corning - ME

Nordex – Alpha Data

Avaya–Telematics / Faronics

Siemon – Beta

Krone - IAL

18. PA / Music System Merlaude - France

Bosch – Holland

Bouyer – Germany

19. Coaxial Cables Raydex

Belden

Commscope

Hrishman

20. CCTV System / DVMR Vicon–UK/USA

Bosch – Holland

Siemens – USA

Bewator – UK

Group 4 - USA

21. Intelligent Lighting Control System Siemens – EIB

Clipsal – C – Bus

ABB - EiB

F & G - EiB

22. Variable Frequency Drives / ABB

Soft Starters Siemens

Allen Bradley

Moeller

Danfoss

23. Dimming System Lutron

Helvar Electrosonic

Quantran

Polaron

Futronics

24. Generator Dawson Keith - UK

Caterpillar - USA

F.G Wilson - UK

25. Cable Glands / Lugs BICC

Ducab Connect



Page 25 of 25

HAWKE

CMP

26. UPS System Schneider – France

Liebert – Italy

Chloride – France

GE – Swiss

AROS - Italy

27. Access Control System ADC Technology - Singapore

DSX – USA

Bewator – UK

Siemens-Germany

Group 4 - USA

28. Nurse Call System Dukane

Intercall

Ackermann

Executon

Simplex

29. Audio / Visual System Sony

JVC

Panasonic

30. Explosion proof Accessories Legrand

Simplex

31. Clock System Simplex

Dukane

32. Light Fittings Refer Schedule of light fittings

*-------------------- * -------------------- *

Note : All Fire related Materials e.g. Fire Alarm, Fire Fighting, Fire Stop Materials, Central

Emergency Lighting, Fire Dampers etc., must have Local Civil Defence Deptt. approval.


ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 2




Page 2 of 5

SECTION 2

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES- INDEX

1.0 LOCAL SWITCHES

2.0 POWER OUTLETS

3.0 FUSE CONNECTION UNITS/DP SWITCHES

4.0 GI BOXES

5.0 ACCESSORIES PLATE FINISH

6.0 MARKING AND LABELING

7.0 MOUNTING HEIGHTS



Page 3 of 5

1.0 LOCAL SWITCHES

1.1 The local switches shall be 20 amp. grid type one-way, two-way, intermediate or

double pole as indicated on the drawings. Where more than one switch is indicated at

any position multiple gang units shall be used.

1.2 Switches shall be of the quick start make, slow break type specially designed for AC

circuits to BS Standards. The operation of the switch shall not depend wholly on the

action of the spring. The switches shall generally be of the rocker operated type.

1.3 All switch boxes shall be supplied with adjustable steel grids and earthing terminals.

1.4 Generally, switch units shall be of the adjustable grid pattern and to be secured to the

adjustable grid by means of screws. For flush mounting switches the switch-plate shall

overlap all edges of the box by not less than 7mm. For surface mounting switches the

switchplate shall finish flush with the edges of the switch boxes. Switches for water

heaters and fan coil units shall be complete with neon indicator lights.

1.5 In Plant rooms the switch units shall be surface or flush as required.

1.6 Local switches shall be arranged in convenient positions for switching the various circuits

and generally as indicated on the drawings.

1.7 The switches shall be of the same manufacture for a particular type of switch

throughout the installation. All accessories in wet and damp areas shall be of the

splashproof type to IP54 protection standard.

1.8 All switch boxes should be galvanised steel.

1.9 To ensure easy and correct connection of the conductors during installation, the necessary

terminal shall be easily identified, grouped inline, upward facing, captive and backed out

prior to the installation.

2.0 POWER OUTLETS

2.1 The switch socket outlets, shall be in accordance with BS Standard as appropriate and

shall be of the three pin grounding type.

2.2 Switch socket outlets being fed from essential and UPS sources shall be separately

identified with colour coded labels fixed on the plate. All rockers shall be with neon

indicators.

2.3 Live contact of the socket shall be completely shuttered such that it is not possible to

engage any pin of the plug into a live contact whilst any other pin of the plug is

exposed.

2.4 All floor mounted socket outlets shall be fixed as part of the under floor trunking service

boxes.

2.5 These outlets shall be of the same manufacturer throughout the installation.

2.6 The sockets shall have dual earth terminals as per BS 7671, 2001, Regulation 607. The

sockets shall also have the facility to connect clean earth.



Page 4 of 5

3.0 FUSE CONNECTION UNITS/DP SWITCHES

3.1 These shall be of flush or surface mounting type as manufactured in compliance with BS

Standard as appropriate. The fuse connection units shall incorporate integral switch, neon

indicator and 13 amp fuse links. The 20A DP switches shall be with flex outlet in base and

neon indication lights.

3.2 These shall be of the same manufacturer for a particular type of switch throughout the

installation and shall be complete with the other accessories installed.

4.0 GI BOXES

4.1 GI boxes to be provided with brass earth terminal to facilitate earth wire connection. The

boxes to have sufficient number of 20mm and 25mm knockout and shall comply with BS

4662. Boxes to have adjustable lug for proper installations of wiring accessories. Extension

ring to be used along with GI boxes, in places where the box is deep inside the wall,

marble or concrete.

5.0 ACCESSORIES PLATE FINISH

5.1 All the wiring accessories shall be vandal proof. The accessories plate shall have the

following finishes depending on the location where it is installed and on the feeding

arrangement.

Accessories shall be polished chrome type in all areas except as listed below :

- Accessories in plantrooms shall be metal clad type, and above false ceiling and

inside floor service boxes shall be white polycarbonate.

- Accessories in wet areas and as indicated on drawings shall be weatherproof to IP-

66.

- All external outlets shall be weatherproof to IP-66.

- Weatherproof range shall be suitable for semi recessed mounting and supplied

with back boxes.

- Isolators shall be IP65 for outdoor and plantroom installations

- Isolators feeding the fire and safety equipments (such as fire pumps, lifts, smoke

extract fans, basement ventilation fans, etc) shall be fire rated for 120 min.

- Accessories in Medical gas rooms and in the Oxygen tank yard shall be explosion

proof type.

- All switch plates including SSOs are to be coordinated with tiling layouts by prior

agreement with the Architect on site.

- All sockets within bed head units (other than patient rooms) shall be poly

carbonate



Page 5 of 5

6.0 MARKING AND LABELING

All circuits for lighting and power sockets shall be labeled and marked.

A dedicated label shall be engraved at the socket front face, another label shall be

provided at the back side of wiring accessory

All UPS sockets shall be provided in different color (RED)

7.0 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

Mounting heights of accessories shall be as detailed on Architectural drawings and in

compliance with statutory authority requirements. Installation shall be carried out as

detailed in fit-out plans. Proper co-ordination shall be ensured with relevant subtrades for

installation of accessories on furniture, medical service panels and the like. All necessary

containment and backboxes shall be provided to form a complete installation to the

approval of the Engineer. Such containment shall include but not limited to conduits,

ducts, raceways, skirting / DADO / Underfloor trunking and boxes, etc.

In General, the mounting heights shall be as follows:

Lighting Switches - 1200mm top above FLL

Switch socket outlets - 450mm bottom above FLL

Flex outlet A/C - near to unit

Flex Outlet Water Heater - near to Water Heater.

Kitchen equipments - as per kitchen layout drawings

Note: The 20A double pole switch shall be manufactured to BS 3676 Part 1 1989 and shall

be fitted with neon indicator. The double pole switch supplied for the water heaters shall

be engraved ‘Water Heater’.


STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR

Page 1 of 10

SECTION 3




Page 2 of 10

SECTION 3


INDEX

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

2.0 CHARACTERISTICS OF GENERATOR – GENERAL

3.0 DIESEL ENGINE AND ANCILLARIES

4.0 TESTING

5.0 FUEL SYSTEM

6.0 SOUND INSULATION OF THE ROOM

7.0 EXHAUST

8.0 BATTERY

9.0 CABLES

10.0 SELECTION

11.0 BMS INTERFACE



Page 3 of 10

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The contractor shall supply , install , test and commission a prime generating set with

separate fuel tank of suitable capacity to run the set for 9 hours at rated conditions.

The set shall be complete with all ancillary plant such as starting , fuel , fuel pump, fill in

point, fuel piping, exhaust , cooling , control and alarm panels , circuit breaker

interconnecting wiring , cabling and all other equipment required for the operation of

the sets as per but not limited to this specification .

2.0 CHARACTERISTIC (general) OF THE GENERATOR SETS

Ratings

2.1 Output - 400V , 50 Hz ,1500 Rpm ,0.8 p.f., 1850 KVA

3 phase.

Ambient temperature - 50 degree centigrade .

capability ( Manufacturer’s deration curves shall be provided )

Maximum speed - 1500 Rpm

If the site rating is less than stated rating then a detailed derating chart from the

manufacturer shall be provided.

The offered gensets shall be suitable for installation in closed purpose built generator

room.

2.2 Standards

The equipment and components shall comply with all relevant British / ISO / IEC

standard Specifications.

The machines shall be suitable for installation in an enclosed, ventilated engine room

shown on the relevant drawings.

2.3 DRAWINGS

Reference Drawings :

Basement - 1 power layout and Electrical schematic diagram.

2.3.1 The drawings are for tender purposes only and are to be read in conjunction with this

Specification. Any discrepancy between the drawings and the Specification and any

matter which requires clarification shall be referred to the Engineer during tender period.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of detailed installation drawings

for the complete works including associated builders work, and shall submit all drawings

to the Engineer for approval prior to the commencement of any work.

Approval of such drawings by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his

responsibility to provide an installation suitable in dimension, construction, function and

finish for the purpose intended.



Page 4 of 10

This Specification and the Drawings are intended to indicate generally the arrangement

of apparatus required, but the Contractor will be deemed to have included in his tender

anything necessary to leave the installation complete and in proper working order to the

satisfaction of the Engineer whether or not such items are mentioned in the Specification

or shown on the Drawings.

3.0 DIESEL ENGINE AND ANCILLARIES

3.1 Diesel engine

The diesel engine shall be 4-stroke, either normally aspirated or supercharged and after-

cooled, water cooled, equipped with the following :

- Heavy duty air-cleaner, with service indicators

- Crank case breather

- Lubricating - oil engine driven pump

- Lubricating - oil simplex filter, with replaceable elements

- Lubricating - oil cooler

- Engine - driven jacket water pump

- Fuel filter, with service indicators

- Flexible fuel lines

- Fuel priming pump

- Dry exhaust manifold, fitting and flange

- Flywheel and flywheel housing

- Governor, Electronic

- Manual and automatic shut-off

- Oil pressure gauge

- Cooling water temperature gauge

- Digital Tachometer

- Electric starting - 24VDC.

3.2. Air filters

Air filters shall be suitable for use in the environmental conditions which are likely to arise

occasionally, with the atmosphere highly polluted by blown sand. They shall be fitted

with an ‘Air filter condition’ indicator of the vacuum type which shall be fitted to the air

inlet manifold.

3.3 Cooling

Thermostatically controlled bypass valves shall be fitted to the engine cooling water

system to maintain cooling water at optimum temperature.

3.4 Governor

The governor shall be Electronic type. It shall control the speed within the limits laid

down in the respective Standards.

3.5 Engine shut - off.

The engine shall be fitted with a mechanically operated device which will shut off the

fuel supply to the engine when any of the specified alarm conditions occur. The device



Page 5 of 10

shall be fitted with one normally open and one normally closed contact which will trip

and lock-out the generator circuit breaker in the event of the automatic device

operating. Micro switches shall not be used in any direct current circuit nor in any

inductive circuit.

3.6 Starting System

The electric starting equipment shall be so designed that :-

(a) at engine speeds in excess of the minimum firing speed it shall be impossible to

complete the starting circuit and

(b) not more than three consecutive attempts to start may be made in any period

of 1 minute, each starting period and the period between such consecutive

attempts being automatically timed controlled by the equipment. At the failure

of the third attempt the starter circuit shall be locked out pending manual re-

setting.

3.7 Generator

The generator shall be of the brushless, revolving field, solid - state exciter type, single

bearing construction, directly coupled to and sharing a common high bed plate with

diesel engine and the radiator.

The generator shall be complete with all necessary cooling fans, excitation and voltage

regulating equipment. The excitation system shall not include a commutator.

The generator shall be star connected.

The generator shall be capable of maintaining the continuous maximum rated output

when operating within +/- 1% of rated voltage and at rated power factor.

The critical speed shall exceed twice the overspeed test value.

All windings shall be tropicalised and suitably impregnated to withstand the site ambient

conditions.

The generator shall meet the following requirements :

- IEC 34/1 standard requirements

- Class H insulation with tropicalisation and anti-abrasion

- Three - phase sensing.

- Drip - proof enclosure, IP22

- Pilot shaft alignment

- 150 % over speed capability.

- Less than 5 % wave form deviation

- Standard paralleling capability

- Volts per Hertz, generator mounted, digital automatic voltage regulator, three

phase sensing , assuring less than +/- 1% voltage regulation

- Adjustable voltage droop for parallel operation

- Adjustable voltage gain to compensate for engine speed droop and line loss.

- Less than 50 Telephone Influence Factor (TIF)

- Less than 3% Total Harmonics Factor (THF)

- Radio interference suppressed to the limits specified in BS 800

The generator shall also be equipped with manual voltage control.



Page 6 of 10

3.7.1 Exciter

The core and poles of the exciter shall be made of high permeability low loss steel

stamping tightly clamped and secured to minimize magnetic noise. The characteristics

of the exciter shall comply fully with the operational requirements of the alternator in

matching the required loading conditions. PM excited generators shall be provided.

3.7.2 Ventilation of generator and exciter.

The generator and exciter shall incorporate shaft mounted fans of sufficient capacity to

provide the machine cooling effects necessary to comply with the temperature

requirements of the Specification when operating in the specified ambient conditions.

3.7.3 Voltage Regulation

Continuously active, quick acting automatic excitation control equipment responsive to

the generator line to line voltage and loading conditions shall be provided to maintain

the alternator voltage within the prescribed limits. Equipment will be based wholly on

static state devices. Variable Regulation capability regulators shall be preferred.

Diode monitor and loss of excitation protection shall be provided.

The equipment shall include all selector switches, indicating instruments, rectifiers,

resistors and any other auxiliary components necessary for the satisfactory opeation of

the plant.

A voltage setting device capable of adjusting the required voltage in steps of 1 volt

between the limits of 90% and 110% of normal voltage at any load within the rating of

the machine shall be mounted on the control panel.

When the generator maximum continuous load at rated power factor is rejected, the

regulator equipment shall be capable of limiting the generator momentary over voltage

to a value not exceeding 125% rated voltage and shall restore the voltage to within 1%

of the nominal present value within 3 seconds.

Over-voltage/undervoltage and overexcitation protection shall be provided.

3.8 Set Mountings

The diesel engine, the generator and exciter, and the radiator shall be mounted a

common welded steel bedplate. Where flange mounted generators are not employed,

the bedplates shall be stress relieved before machining.

Lifting points shall be provided on the bedplate.

Suitable anti-vibration mounting shall be supplied for the diesel generator unit, and all

set mounted ancillary apparatus.

Flexible connections shall be provided to all exhaust, air, fuel and water piping to avoid

fracture due to vibration and to minimize conduction of noise.

Any necessary foundation bolts shall be supplied under this Contract.

3.9 Safety Guards.

All moving parts shall be adequately guarded in accordance with BS 1649 and to the

satisfaction of the Engineer, in order to prevent danger to personnel.



Page 7 of 10

3.10 Generator set control equipment

The control equipment is designed to start and stop the set automatically from a remote

signal.

The signal will be issued by the Automatic mains failure panel as described elsewhere.

The generator set control equipment shall be set mounted and shall be based on

microprocessor based system to provide maximum system flexibility

The control function shall be provided with an OFF/ MANUAL/AUTO/COOLDOWN STOP

switch.

3.10.1 The following digital measuring instruments with liquid crystal display shall be fitted :

- an ammeter - 3 phase

- a voltmeter - 3 phase -

- a 3 position ammeter/voltmeter selector switch

- a frequency meter, in Hz and rpm

- an hours - run meter.

- power factor meter

- Coolant Temperature

- KW (total & per phase)

- KVA , KVAR , KW-Hr meter

- Oil Pressure

- System Diagnostic

3.10.2 Automatic shut-down and lock-out circuits shall be fitted for :

- low oil pressure

- Over voltage/Under voltage

- Low coolant level

- Over current

- Reverse power

3.10.3 Indicator lamps shall be fitted, together with a lamp-test push-button for :

- low oil pressure shut down

- high water temperature shut-down

- overspeed sit-down

- failure to start/overcrank

- Emergency stop

- Fault shutdown/Alarm.

- 2 spare external faults.

3.10.4 A manually re-set, master shut-down relay shall be provided on the control panel, so

arranged that upon the occurrence of the specified fault conditions the relay shall

automatically :-

(a) break the closing circuit of the circuit-breaker.

(b) make the tripping circuit of the circuit-breaker.

(c) stop the engine.

(d) close the voltage free contact for a remote alarm.



Page 8 of 10

Simultaneously, an audible alarm shall be given, and the cause of the stoppage shall be

displayed and remain displayed on the control panel and the building management

system until the alarm device is manually re-set.

When the control selector switch is in the AUTO position, the audible alarm shall be

operative.

The control panel shall have a self-diagnostic feature to asses the condition of the

various senders and sensing components.

An adjustable run on “off load” timer, shall be fitted to provide cool down running.

All individual circuits such as voltmeter, shutdown circuits etc. shall be adequately

protected by fuses.

All control wiring shall be carried out in PVC insulated cable termination and relative

terminals shall be clearly marked.

Engine wiring shall be protected by non-metallic conduit.

The control equipment shall also include a breaker as shown on drawings complete with

short-circuit magnetic and thermal overload trips, separately housed in a sheet steel

enclosure adjacent to the control panel. A shunt trip & Auxiliary contacts shall also be

provided. A separate enclosure fixed on the breaker, enclosure with busbars extending

from the breaker shall be provided and the outgoing power cables shall be terminated

on the busbars.

Separate busbar cubicle must be provided to enable termination of multicore cables.

4.0 TESTING

The set shall be subjected to the following works tests at the factory prior to Shipment. All

Certificates must be submitted for prior approval. The same tests shall be repeated at

the Supplier’s local facility before delivery the set to site.

(1) General inspection of equipment to check its compliance with specification

(2) Timed Start from operation of push button to acceptance of full load.

(3) 1/2 hour 50 % load

1 hour 100 % load

(4) Determination of voltage and frequency regulations under following load

changes :

(a) No load to 110 % load in steps not exceeding 25%

(b) 100 % load to no load in a single step .

(5) Operation of all protection circuits by simulation.

(6) Operation of UPS fed loads on normal and generator supply (after installation at

site and commissioning).



Page 9 of 10

5.0 Fuel System

Fuel tank with capacity suitable for 24 hours 100% operation shall be made of stainless

steel sheets and fuel pipework shall be with MS pipes and fittings.

The tank shall be supplied and installed, fully piped up, to provide the service

requirements of the genset and as shown on drawings The tank shall be complete with

filler cap, contents gauge, overflow pipe, vent pipe and sludge valve. The fuel tank shall

be filled as required for testing and commissioning and shall be full at the time of

handing over.

6.0 Sound insulation of the room and Vibration Criteria

The contractor shall provide sound level data of the proposed equipment for review of

the Engineer. The noise level outside the genset room shall not exceed 75 dBA at 3

meters. Attenuators shall be provided for radiator discharge and air intake. The air

intake requirements shall be coordinated at site.

The generator base mounted springs shall be able to absorb 95% of the Engine

vibrations. Any louvers provided in generator room shall be of the acoustic type.

7.0 Exhaust

All exhaust gases shall be suitably piped outside the genset room . The engine shall be

efficiently, silenced and be complete with a silencer and all fixings to attach the silencer

to the generator room ceiling. In addition to erecting the silencer the Contractor shall

also be responsible for providing and erecting the fittings necessary to carry the tail pipe

through the generator room wall. All fixings shall be anti-vibration type where required

and galvanized. Exhaust pipes of the proper diameter, properly insulated with 50 thk

rockwool insulation and clad with 22G aluminum sheet, shall be supplied and installed.

They shall run from the exhaust silencers to the outside . The exhaust pipes shall

terminate with an adequate bend or cap to prevent ingress of rain.

The total exhaust noise attenuation shall be to 25dBA.

8.0 BATTERY STARTING

The equipment shall include an adequately rated maintenance free lead acid starter

battery together with a suitably rated charger. The battery charger shall be supplied

from the mains (standby supply) and an engine driven dynamo shall be used for boost

charging . The battery shall be protected against accidental, mechanical or electrical

damage and shall be housed in a purpose built rack.

The charger shall be mounted remote from the engine and shall include a battery

charge fail alarm.

Without power supply to the charger, the battery shall be capable of providing no fewer

than four starting cycles within a period of 5 minutes. Upon restoring power supply to the

charger immediately thereafter, the charger shall be capable of restoring the battery,

within 30 minutes, to a condition in which one more starting cycle can be completed.

The following instrumentation and protection shall be provided :



Page 10 of 10

* Charger failure

* Battery voltmeter

* Charge / discharge ammeter.

* On/off switch.

9.0 CABLES

All cables shall be supplied in accordance with local Electricity Authority and Civil Defence

regulations . A schedule of loads and cable sizes shall be submitted to the Engineer for

approval prior to commencement of any work.

10.0 SELECTION

Contractor shall provide detailed calculation and load shedding scheme to match the

capacity of the specified generator.

11.0 BMS INTERFACE

The Generator Control panel shall be equipped with necessary hardware and software for

integration with BMS for monitoring the following items :

1. Voltage

2. Frequency

3. Load Current

4. Diesel level.

5. Generator status (Auto / Manual).

6. High water temperature alarm.

7. High water temperature shutdown.

8. Low oil pressure alarm.

9. Low oil pressure shutdown.

10. Fail to start shutdown.

11. Overspeed shutdown.

12. System diagnostic shutdown.

13. Battery Status.


LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION

Page 1 of 13

SECTION 4




Page 2 of 13

SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION

INDEX

1.0 MAIN LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD – FORM 4

2.0 TESTS

3.0 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION

4.0 AUTO CHANGE OVER PANEL

5.0 SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD

6.0 FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARD

7.0 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER

8.0 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER

9.0 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

10.0 EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER

11.0 CONTACTORS / OVERLOAD RELAYS / CONTROL RELAYS / TIMERS

12.0 INDICATION LAMPS / PUSH BUTTONS / SELECTOR SWITCHES

13.0 SITE CONDITION

14.0 CODES AND STANDARDS

15.0 SWITCH BOARD OPERATORS MAT

16.0 VOLT METER AND AMMETER

17.0 COORDINATION

18.0 ENERGY MONITORING UNIT

19.0 THERMAL IMAGING



Page 3 of 13

1.0 Main Low Voltage Switchboard and Main Distribution Boards – Form–4b Type-6

1.1 The main LV Switchboard shall be of a free standing, cubicle type modular construction

system conforming to fully type tested designs, incorporating ACB's, MCCB's busbars,

fuses, measuring equipment etc. all as required and complying to the latest editions of

BS EN 61439-1. The switchboard shall be from a reputed manufacturer with an

established and IEC 439 - 1 certified quality assurance system to ISO 9001. Non certified

manufacturers will not be acceptable.

All circuit breakers and busbar ratings shall be as per the load schedules and drawings.

All circuit breakers and busbars shall be rated for 50°C. All auxiliary power supplies shall

be provided as per the manufacturer's requirement.

1.2 Design & Construction:

1.2.1 Switchboard construction shall be designed to FORM 4, Type 7 standards for panels as

shown on drawings in accordance with IEC 439-1/ BS EN 61439-1. Busbars shall be in a

separate chamber, fully segregated from the rest of the switchboard. Additional insulating

material shall be provided behind the doors/plates of the busbar chamber. Individual

functional units shall be located in independent compartments.

1.2.2 In addition to compliance with FORM 4 standards, the switchboard shall be successfully

tested for safe containment of an internal arcing fault. Suitable ducts and vents for

individual functional units and busbars shall be incorporated in the switchboard to safely

divert the resultant over pressure and arcing away from the operator and adjacent

functional units. Allowing the gases to escape through the door into the cable way or out

through the back of the board will not be acceptable.

1.2.3 The switchboard shall be of a modular construction and be extendable on both sides.

Welded construction switchboards will not be accepted. The degree of protection shall be

at least IP 42 as defined in IEC 529.

1.2.4 Enclosures shall be made of sheet steel. The basic framework should be roll-formed from 1.6

to 2mm electro-galvanised steel coated with high-solid enamel, polyester electrostatic

spray and oven baked. The doors and panels shall be iron-phosphate steel, coated like the

framework but also with primer. The color shall be RAL 7032 (light grey) or equal. The base

frame shall be of minimum 3mm thick Electro galvanized steel.

1.2.5 Compartments shall be easily accessible for maintenance purposes. Barriers shall be

included between each compartment to contain an internal fault as defined in BS / IEC

standards to ensure safe maintenance on any outgoing circuit when the remainder of the

board is alive. Each compartment shall be provided with a separately fixed thermostat

controlled heater at the bottom.

1.2.6 The maximum height of the enclosure shall be 2400 mm. All meters, lamps, operating

handles shall be within a maximum height of 2000 mm. All dimensions shall be of uniform

appearance. All live conductors shall be shielded in such a manner that they cannot be

accidentally touched when the doors are open. All doors and plates shall be

interchangeable and may be hinged left, right, top and bottom as standard. Doors shall

be provided with an integral gasket and earth stud and a range of locks to meet all

regulations.



Page 4 of 13

1.2.7 All internal separations shall be from standard pre-fabricated plates. The usage of Bakelite,

fiber sheets or any other material to provide internal separation will not be acceptable.

The internal separation between compartments and sections shall be at least IP 40.

1.2.8 Suitable cableways shall be provided for each functional unit section. There shall be front

access for cabling purposes. It shall be possible to safely terminate or work on the outgoing

cables of any functional unit without having to switch off the main breaker or adjacent

functional units. Switchboards shall be suitable for bottom or top cable entry as specified.

All openings and entries shall be vermin proof. Switchboards shall be arranged such that

safe access (front, rear, side) may be readily obtained. Adjustable gland plates, adequate

channel frames and cable clamps for cable supports shall be provided.

1.3 Busbars:

1.3.1 Busbars shall be of rectangular cross section HDHC tinned copper and suitably rated for

continuos operation. The main busbar rating shall be the same throughout the entire

length of the switchboard. The busbars and primary connections shall comply with BS 159.

The surface temperature of the busbar shall not exceed 85°C over an ambient of 50°C.

Connections to incoming circuit breakers shall be of the same rating.

1.3.2 Busbars shall be installed in a separate chamber and shall run along the whole length of

the switchboard, which allows for easy extension in the future. Vertical droppers if any, shall

run behind each functional unit section. Busbars shall be rigidly supported along their entire

length. The busbar supports shall be of a high-grade polymer. The mechanical and

dielectric strength of the busbars and supports shall be capable of withstanding the worst

fault conditions and as per ASTA testing requirements.

1.3.3 The main busbar system shall be of a parallel 2 bar per phase arrangement . All

switchboards shall be complete with a neutral and earth bar running along the full length

of the panel. The cross section of the neutral bar shall be same as that of the phase

conductor and that of the earth bar is at least half the size as that of the phase bar.

1.3.4 Busbars and connections shall be color coded for phase identification and shall conform

to the phase sequence R-Y-B, counting from left to right ,upper to lower and from near to

remote when viewed from the operating side of the switchboard.

1.3.5 Under no circumstances will common earth / neutral bar be acceptable. Earth bars,

neutral bars and links shall be so located and mounted that access to them is not

obstructed by the structure or wiring of the switchboard and so that all outgoing neutral

and earth conductors can be readily and safely connected and disconnected without

moving other cables or disconnecting the incoming supply to the switchboard.

1.3.6 The main busbar shall be certified to withstand a fault level of at least 50KA for 1 second.

This certificate shall be from ASTA or an independent and recognized testing authority.

1.4 Panel wiring / Terminal Blocks / Labels:

1.4.1 All internal and control wiring shall be 600 / 1000V PVC insulated stranded copper cable to

BS 6231. All cables shall be adequately rated and not less than 2.5 sq.mm. , run on PVC

cables trays .. Each cable shall be properly terminated at both ends with loops. When

wiring is across door hinges, it shall be enclosed by a flexible PVC tubing and be looped to



Page 5 of 13

permit the opening of doors and removal of components for inspection. Plastic ferrules with

correct numbers shall be fitted on all wires to correspond with circuit number and diagram.

1.4.2 Terminal blocks for power and control wiring shall be of Cage Clamp connection

technique in which the only tool required is a flat – bladed screwdriver .Once the

conductor is inserted ,the stainless steel cage clamp shall automatically provide the

correct clamping force for a secure connection. Screws terminals shall not be used. Cables

having the same number shall be terminated at adjacent terminals and connected by

means of cable jumpers at the terminal block. Terminal blocks shall be grouped according

to the working voltage, power circuit and control circuit. 10% of spare terminals and not

less than two numbers shall be provided on each group of terminal block.

1.4.3 All Circuit breakers, Feeders' etc. shall be provided with labels of adequate dimensions.

Labels shall be of traffolyte having a white background with engraved letters. They shall be

screw fixed on the panel.

1.5 Metering and indication:

1.5.1 The Mains supply incomer shall be provided with ammeter, a voltmeter and RYB phase

indication lamps. KWH meter shall be provided and shall be of an approved type and

make by the Utility. Ammeters and voltmeters shall be as specified elsewhere.

1.5.2 Indicating lamps shall be of the long life LED type. They shall be connected through

individually fused circuits tapped from the outgoing side of the main switch.

1.5.3 Internal and auxiliary wiring shall be of the 600/1000V grade with a minimum cross section

of 2.5-sq. mm.

1.5.4 For the generator supply incomer circuit breaker, the following meters and indication shall

be provided:

(a) Digital Ammeters

(b) Digital Voltmeter

(c) Frequency meter 45-60 Hz range

(d) Hour run meter

(e) Power factor meter

(f) kW meter

(g) Indicating lamps to indicate each phase live (red, yellow & blue).

2.0 Tests:

The panels shall undergo the following tests in the factory before despatch:

a) Primary Injection Test for all Circuit Breakers.

b) Secondary Test for all protective relays and meters, CT polarity tests.

c) Millivolt Drop Test

d) HV Test 2.5kV for 1 min.



Page 6 of 13

e) Insulation test

f) Function Test

These tests shall be carried out in presence of the Consultant.

3.0 Drawings and Information:

The vendor shall furnish following submittal after placement of order:

i) General Arrangement drawing showing front view, plan, foundation plan ,floor

cutouts and trenches for external cables , elevations, transport sections and

weights.

ii) Sectional drawings of various types of feeders, panels showing general

constructional features, mounting details of various devices, busbars, current

transformers, cable boxes, terminal boxes for control cables etc.

iii) Schematic and control wiring diagrams for each type of feeder and protection

including indicating devices, metering instruments, alarms, space heaters etc.

iv) Terminal plan showing terminal numbers, ferrule markings ,device terminal

numbers, functions etc. and

v) Control wiring diagrams.

Vendor shall provide a copy of the above drawings for approval and a copy of the as

built drawings for records.

The information furnished shall include the following:

i) Technical literature giving complete information of the equipment.

ii) Erection, Operation and maintenance manual complete with all relevant

information, drawings and literature for auxiliary equipment and accessories,

characteristics for relays etc.

iii) An equipment list with detailed specifications and make.

4.0 Auto Change Over Panel

4.1 General

The Automatic Transfer switch shall be of mechanically and electrically interlocked type

to exclude any possibility of coupling together the normal and emergency sources.

To ensure continuity of service both air circuit breakers shall have two stable position,

Closed and Open. It shall be possible to manually operate each air circuit breaker (or

unprotected circuit breaker) in the event of the absence of control voltage.

For maintenance purpose, the transfer switches shall have a neutral position with both

air circuit breakers in the Open position. It shall also be possible to lock each air circuit

breaker in the Open position.



Page 7 of 13

Each air circuit breaker (or unprotected circuit breaker) of the transfer switch shall be

equipped with auxiliary contacts and alarm contacts (Tripped status indication).

4.2 Construction

Operations of the air circuit breakers (or unprotected circuit breaker) shall be by

individual momentarily energized motor on each breaker.

The mechanical interlock for 2 air circuit breakers side by side may be achieved with two

cables.

ATS switch shall be equipped with microprocessors / PLC based controller to carry out

the following functions :

a. Switching from one source to another depending on the presence of voltage on

the transformer / generator.

b. Control of engine generating set.

c. Load shedding and reconnection of non priority circuits.

d. Switching to the generator source in the event of failure of normal source.

e. Circuit breaker status indications shall be displayed in front of the controller (On /

Off fault).

f. Test push button shall be provided on the front of the controller to check the

transfer from normal to emergency and return to normal source.

g. Controller shall be equipped with adjustment of time delays infront.

5.0 Sub Main Distribution Board:

5.1 The panel board shall be wall mounting type constructed to BS EN 61439, Form-2b Type-2

requirements. It shall be constructed of minimum 2mm thick electro-galvanised steel

coated with high solid enamel polyester electrostatic spray and oven baked. The color

shall be RAL 7032 (light grey). The degree of protection of the board shall be IP54.

Submain panel boards shall be provided with minimum 2 no. pad locks with locks and key.

5.2 Busbars shall be of hard drawn, high conductivity tinned copper and rated for continuos

operation. The phase bar, neutral bar and earth bar shall be identified by approved colour

codes. The neutral bar shall be of the same cross section as the phase bus bar. A sub feed

neutral assembly with a removable link for isolation shall be available as an integral part of

the Distribution board. Earthing bar assembly shall also be available to facilitate the

connection of earth continuity conductors.

5.3 All Circuit breakers , Metering and Busbar ratings shall be as per the load schedules and

drawings.The main MCCB and the feeder breakers shall be of appropriate capacity.

5.4 Panel wiring, Terminal blocks and labels shall be as specified for the Main Distribution

Boards.



Page 8 of 13

5.5 Tests to be conducted on the SMDB before despatch and the Drawings to be furnished

shall be the same as specified for Main Distribution Boards.

6.0 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

6.1 Description

6.1.1 The specification hereunder shall be applied to al panel boards referenced on the

drawings/load schedules as DB's.

The distribution board shall be flush / surface mounted split busbar type and shall be

provided with standard extension box to allow cable glanding if required. The distribution

board shall be surface mounted when installed within the electrical room/service rooms.

Distribution boards shall be provided with an isolator incomer with common ELCB’s for

group of lighting circuits and common ELCB’s for group of power circuits for each section

of MCB’s or RCBO’s for each power circuit as shown on schedules.

6.1.3 As a standard item, all MCB boards shall be provided with permanent circuit identification

charts to the approval of the engineer.

6.1.4 MCB’s shall comply with IEC – 898 and RCBO’s shall comply with BSEN 61009. ELCB’s shall

comply with BSEN 61008.

6.2 Enclosures

6.2.1 The MCB Distribution Boards shall be surface/flush mounted type. The enclosures within

Electrical rooms shall be surface mounting type. The enclosures shall be powder coated

rustproof sheet steel units, complete with circuit breakers providing thermal overload and

magnetic short-circuit and earth fault protection as shown on the drawings. The enclosure

protection shall be IP 31, while the complete assembly shall comply with IEC – 439-1.

6.3 Busbar

6.3.1 The MCBs shall be mounted on either 3 phase or single phase or split busbars as

appropriate. All spaces which are not provided with breakers shall be covered with blank

plates.

6.3.2 A final sub-circuit neutral assembly and an earthing bar assembly shall be available to

facilitate the connection of neutral conductors and protective conductors respectively.

6.4 Breakers

6.4.1 Miniature circuit breakers, RCBO’s and earth leakage circuit breaker and shall be provided

as indicated on the load schedules.

6.4.2 The short circuit rating for the MCB’s and RCBO’s shall be 10KA.

6.4.3 All circuit breakers shall be factory calibrated to ambient temperature of 50 deg.C.

7.0 Air Circuit Breakers

7.1 Air Circuit Breakers shall be designed and constructed to have a short circuit breaking

capacity of not less than 50 kA and shall comply with the latest editions of IEC 947-2 and



Page 9 of 13

BS 4752. They shall be of the fully withdrawable type and motor operated. ACB On/Off

pushbuttons with On/Off indication lamps shall be provided.

ACBs shall be 3 or 4 pole type as indicated on drawings.

7.2 Suitable automatic safety shutters shall be provided to cover live parts when the ACB is in

the withdrawn position. There shall be 3 distinct positions i.e.

"Connected"

"Test"

"Disconnected-Isolated"

There shall also be a "Withdrawn" position.

7.3 ACB's shall have adequately designed Arc chutes and Arc shields for fast and effective

Arc chopping. The protective release shall be of the solid state electronic type having

protection against overloads, short circuits and ground fault with adjustable time and

current settings. The following protections shall be included :

(a) Overload protection (LT)

(b) Short-circuit protection (ST)

(c) Instantaneous short-circuit protection (I)

(d) Ground fault protection (GF)

7.4 The ACB shall have sufficient auxiliary contacts with a minimum of 2 NO and 2 NC

contacts.

8.0 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker

8.1 Moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest editions of BS 4752 and IEC 947-

2. The short circuit breaking capacities of the MCCB's installed in the main LV

switchboards shall be at least 50 kA and 35KA in SMDB’s. The MCCBs used on the project

shall be of the plug-in type.

8.2 MCCB's shall be of the heavy-duty quick make break type. All MCCB's shall be ambient

temperature compensated to give the ratings indicated in the drawings at 50°C for

which a formal certificate confirming that MCCB's have been temperature

compensated should be furnished. Each breaker shall have on each phase a thermal

over current release and also an instantaneous magnetic trip both of the adjustable

type. Four pole breakers shall have a common trip both with a single operating handle

and designed so that any overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open.

Breakers shall be trip free and each shall have a trip indication independent of ON or

OFF positions. To reset from the tripped position the mechanism shall first pass through

the off position. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a

position between ON and OFF.

8.3 The MCCB’s in LV MDB’s and MCC’s as shown on drawings shall be withdrawable type.

9.0 Disconnect Switches

9.1 Disconnect switches and isolator shall comply with IEC-947.



Page 10 of 13

9.2 Disconnect switches shall be provided at each motor controller and appliance location

. Isolators shall be rated to connect and disconnect 5 to 7 times the rated current of the

item being switched. Isolators shall have a fully visual braking characteristic. Isolator

enclosures shall be made of aluminium alloy to IP-65 and shall be provided with

padlockable handle interlocked with the door. Isolators exposed to weather shall be

housed within self-extinguished polyester loaded fiberglass panels to IP65.

10.0 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers(ELCB's)

10.1 Current operated Earth leakage Circuit breakers shall comply with BS EN 61008.

10.2 The ELCB's shall have a residual current operated electromechanical release and shall

incorporate a filtering device to eliminate unwanted tripping due to transient voltage. A

test button is to prove operation of the ELCB.

The ELCB's shall have 100mA sensitivity for lighting circuits and 30mA for power circuits.

11.0 Contactors / Overload Relays/ Control Relays/Timers

11.1 Contactors:

Contactors shall be in conformance to IEC 947-4 / CSA 22.2 No.14 and shall be CE

approved / CSA Certified.

The magnets and contact movements of the contactor shall be horizontal. The contacts

shall be double break, butt type and each moving contact shall be individually spring

loaded. The fixed and moving contacts shall be of silver -cadmium oxide. The contactor

coils shall be continuously rated and shall be wound on moulded formers. Contactors

shall be factory calibrated, ambient temperature compensated and sealed. It shall be

possible to attach the contactors to 35mm DIN Mounting Rail (EN 50 022). Power

contactors shall be provided with a minimum of 2 NO and 2 NC Auxiliary contacts.

The contactors shall provide greater performance in less panel space. There shall be

flexibility in the selection of front mounting or side mounting of auxiliary contacts .The

contactor shall design features for IP 2LX finger protection against accidental contact

with live components, positive drive contacts and protection against manual operation,

Auxiliary and relay contacts shall be compatible with electronic circuits to 17V, 5mA.

11.2 Overload Relays

Overload relays shall confirm to IEC 947-4 /CSA C22.2 No 14 and shall be CSA certified /

CE approved.

The motor overload protection should have a protection choice of trip class 10 or 20. As

a standard, the overload relay shall offer a manually operated trip function, visible trip

indicator and isolated N.O. alarm contacts are to be used to protect motor circuits

against overloads, phase sequence, phase failure (single phasing) and under voltage

conditions. The relay range selected shall be such that the full load current of the

equipment falls well within the relay adjustment range. The energy consumption of the

relay shall be not above 150mW.

11.3 Control Relays



Page 11 of 13

Control relays shall conform to IEC 255-10-00 and shall be CSA certified.

Control relays shall be of plug in type and shall have built in LED’s. They shall have

miniature square bases with blade terminals. The contacts shall be of silver cadmium

rated for 5A continuos current. The control relays shall be suitable for wiring with spade

type crimped lugs.

11.4 Timers

Timers shall conform to IEC 255-1 and shall be CSA certified.

Timer relays with adjustable range for the Star delta starter shall ensure precise

reproducibility of the timing function. The relay shall be equipped with Single pole

double throw 1 Pole change over contact two electrically separated time delayed

contact one normally open and one normally close.

12.0 Indication lamps / Push Buttons / Selector switches.

12.1 Indicating lamps:

The Indicating lamps shall be LED type.

12.2 Push Buttons:

Push button shall be flush type with colors in accordance with BS4099. Push Buttons

contact blocks shall have double break silver plated contacts in NO / NC configuration

rated not less than 5A resistive at 240AC, 50Hz. Push Buttons shall feature a diaphragm

seal to protect the button from the entrance of oil , water and other contaminants. O-

ring seals, which rely on lubricants, shall not be used.

Start and stop push buttons shall be of shrouded type.

Emergency stop push buttons shall be of maintained contact, pull to reset and lockable

at EM-stop to prevent reset. Engraved legend plates shall be fitted with all push

buttons.

12.3 Selector switches:

Selector switches shall be positive action rotary can switches, which shall incorporate

double break contacts. Selector contacts shall be double break and of hard silver alloy.

They shall have a minimum continues current rating of 10A and be of a high breaking

capacity. The switch positions shall be marked on all engraved legend plates, which

shall be made from black, white, black traffolyte, and the minimum character size shall

be 3 mm. Operating knobs of the rotary type with lever or key operated actuators.

Hands -Off -Auto selector switch shall have three positions with center position as off.

13.0 Site condition:

Altitude : Sea level

Relative Humidity : 100%



Page 12 of 13

Design ambient temperature : 50 deg. C

Surface temperature : Solar radiation may increase surface

Temperature up to 80 deg. C.

Rainfall : 54.4 mm maximum per day.

Atmosphere : Salipherous atmosphere often containing fine

dust and pollutants in particular CO2 and H2S.

14.0 Codes and Standards:

IEC 38 Standard voltages

IEC 50 International Electro technical Vocabulary.

IEC 51 Recommendations for indicating electrical measuring instruments

IEC 59 Standard current ratings

BSEN 60947-2

IEC 947-2 Air Circuit Breaker/ Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.

IEC 158 Low voltage control gear

IEC 185 Current Transformer.

IEC 186 Voltage Transformer

IEC 255 Relays

IEC 269 LV fuses with high breaking capacity.

IEC 277 Definitions for switchgear and control gear.

IEC 292 Low voltage motor starter.

IEC 337 Control switches.

IEC 341 Push button switches

IEC 408 Low voltage air break switches, air break disconnectors, air break switch

disconnectors and fuse combination units.

IEC 439-1 Factory built assemblies of low voltage switchgear and controlgear

BS EN 61439-1

IEC 445 Identification of equipment terminals and of termination of certain

conductors, including general rules of alphanumeric system.

IEC 446 Identification of insulated and bare conductor by colors

IEC 529 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures.

IEC 898 Miniature Circuit Breaker.

(The equivalent British standards for the above IEC specifications

shall also apply)

15.0 VOLT METER AND AMMETER

15.1 Volt meters and ammeter used throughout the project shall be of the digital type and shall

be fitted into the front of the panels.

15.2 The meters shall have a dielectric strength of 2KV at 50Hz for 1 minute with 7 segments light

emitting diode displays and the figure height shall be 20mm.



Page 13 of 13

15.3 Meters shall have 4 digits display and shall have an accuracy of 1% or better.

16.0 SWITCHBOARD OPERATOR'S MAT

16.1 All electrical switch cupboards and plantroom switchboard shall be provided with a 1M

wide carbon free rubber mat or mats, having a ribbed upper surface and being of such

length to suit the full operating extent of each switchboard.

16.2 The insulating mats shall each be certified to have sustained, without failure, a one minute

voltage test at 2 KV.

17.0 COORDINATION

Complete co-ordination study of the distribution shall be carried out to establish tripping

time of breakers at the different levels. Breakers shall be upgraded, if required based on

the study, to achieve proper co-ordination without any cost to the Client. The co-

ordination study and short circuit calculations of the complete distribution shall be

submitted for the approval of the Engineer.

18.0 ENERGY MONITORING UNIT

Digital energy monitoring unit with MODBUS or equivalent communication capabilities shall

be provided in each main LV Panel and as shown on drawings and shall be integrated

with BMS.

19.0 THERMAL IMAGING

Thermal imaging shall be carried out on LV switchgear panel, busbars, bus joints, busbar

connection points, tap-off units, etc. before handing over and at the end of

maintenance period.


VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

Page 1 of 6

SECTION 5




Page 2 of 6

SECTION 5


INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 SPECIFICATIONS

3.0 INSPECTIONS AND FACTORY TEST



Page 3 of 6

1.0 GENERAL

This Specification describes the requirements for the 400V Variable Frequency Drive

Controllers (VFD). The 400V Variable Frequency Drive Controllers shall be designed and

provided in accordance with this Specification and the attached data sheets. The

proposed Manufacturers installation requirements should be complied by the

Manufacturers as part of the Contract including shielded power cables (if required),

enclosure for VFD’s, earthing requirements, etc to achieve EMC Compatible installation. All

details shall be furnished as part of the submittal.

All equipment shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest

edition of the applicable:

NFPA 70

IEC 146

EN Standard / CE marked for EMC directives:

Emissions Immunity

EN 50081-1 EN 50082-1

EN 50081-2 EN 50082-2

EN 55011 Class A IEC 801-1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8

EN 55011 Class B EN 50178

EN 60204-1

The manufacturer shall furnish the product as listed and classified by underwriter’s

laboratories as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

The VFD product line shall be capable of operating normally in an environment with an

ambient temperature range of 0 °C to 50 °C with a relative humidity of up to 95%

(non-condensing). The enclosed current rating shall be derated by 10% for each 5 °C

above 50 °C not exceeding 60 °C.

The product line shall be capable of being shipped and stored in an environment with an

ambient temperature range of 0 °C to 65 °C.

The nominal operating altitude shall be less than 1000 m above sea level.

Ship controllers in convenient sections crated and protected, bearing in mind the hazards

of transportation.

All necessary bus connections, wire jumpers, bolts, nuts, etc. shall be suitably packed and

identified to facilitate field assembly.

2.0 SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 The variable speed drive controllers’ technical requirements shall be in accordance with

the data sheets. Seller shall be responsible for ensuring that under all operating conditions:



Page 4 of 6

- The controllers and their characteristics shall be compatible with their respective

driven production motor and the plant control system. Seller shall obtain speed

(frequency) range required and maximum frequency permitted for each type of

controller from the load equipment supplier.

- The VFD shall be suitable for use with high efficiency Design B, 400 V motors.

- The total harmonic distortion (THD) voltage in the plant electrical and local DEWA

systems shall not exceed 5% and no individual harmonic shall exceed 3% during

normal plant operation.

- Computerised harmonic analysis studies to IEEE Standard 519; copies of the studies

shall be provided with the proposal.

- The VFD shall be fully digital pulse width modulated type (PWM) using latest

generation IGBT’s with isolating contactors and line reactors.

2.2 The VFD controllers shall be suitable for operation on 400 Volt ±15%, 3 phase, 50 Hz input

power supply and 0-400 Volt, 3 phase, 0.5 to 400 Hz output. No transformer shall be used

on either the input or output of the VFD.

2.3 Each controller shall comprise:

- Enclosure with filters and gaskets construction, mounted on steel sills.

- Incoming supply terminals complete with cable lugs.

- Padlockable line disconnect switch with bolt on HRC fuses in each phase.

- 110% overload capacity above motor service factor demand (115%) for 30

minutes.

- Short circuit and current limit protection.

- Surge (TVSS) protection.

- Stop/Start contactor to ensure when the motor is not running, no voltage is present

on the motor power terminals.

- Wireways with removable gland plates.

- Incoming power system isolation transformer, if required, with thermal sensing in

each phase, and filters to limit on the plant 400V bus THD to 5%; no single harmonic

to be more than 3%.

- Drive operation man machine interface (MMI) keyboard.

- Stepless non reversing minimum and maximum motor speed adjustments,

adjustable ramp up rates, minimum/maximum speed limits for pump motors.

Adjustments to be password protected.

- Man/Auto select switch via keypad, with locking via password in both positions

(see Note).

- Local/Remote selector switch via keypad with locking via password in both

positions (see Note).

- “Drive Ready” with remote signal.

- Stop and start pushbuttons via keypad, in remote mode.

- Speed control: Local/Remote/Automatic via keypad.

- Motor speed indication via LED display.

- Motor On/Off indication via LED display.

- Emergency stop pushbutton, local at controller and local to plant.

- Drive status and failure diagnostic feature via LED display. Feature to log, time and

date the last 30 fault conditions.

- Indication of output to drive current on each phase.



Page 5 of 6

- Isolated I/O control signals.

- Motor multi-function protection, providing short circuit (51), overvoltage (59),

undervoltage (27), thermal (49), stalling (49S) and phase unbalance (46)

protections, complete with ground fault (51G) protection device to trip the

incoming supply.

- Bolted and shrouded bolted type terminals for terminating load cables.

- Weidmuller or Wieland type terminal blocks shall be provided to connection of

external wiring and cables.

- Interposing relays as required.

- 110V AC control voltage or manufacturers standard.

- Microprocessor based electronic self-diagnostics and fault detection system.

- Each cubicle shall be provided with a earthing bus, complete with two connectors

for connecting to the plant earthing system. Drilled holes shall be provided for

connecting cable earth conductor.

- VFD controllers shall be provided with a lamacoid engraved nameplate, minimum

size 150mm x 75mm, engraving details to be provided by Purchaser.

- The VFD shall have built-in ventilation fan and dust filter. The controller to be

remote mounted at front door for manual adjustments and monitoring of

parameters.

- The VFD shall have thermal cut-off provision for the motor over temperature.

In “Man” mode, two modes shall be functional: Local or Remote. In “Local” mode, motor

shall be started from Start/Stop pushbuttons via controller’s keypad. In “Remote” mode,

motor shall be started from pushbutton station located near motor (if required).

2.4 Performance

The VFD shall have the following features as a minimum:

- Minimum efficiency of 97% at maximum load and speed.

- Minimum line side displacement power factor of 0.95 to 1.0 logging at all speeds

and loads.

- Adjustable motor frequency of 0 to 400 Hz.

- Separately adjustable acceleration and deceleration ramps from 0 to 999

seconds.

- Rotating motor restart feature.

- Capable of running without a motor connected for set-up and testing.

- Skip frequency reject point to prevent operating of the equipment at a resonant

speed.

- Ride through for power outage of at least 2 seconds duration

- Load loss detection

- Overload protection

- Auto economizer

- The flying start feature operable with or without encoder feedback

2.5 Discrete Operation

Inputs

- Start

- Stop

Outputs



Page 6 of 6

- Ready to start

- Running

- VFD general fault alarm status

- VFD Auto and Man/Local/Remote operation status

2.6 Analog Operation

Inputs

- Speed control signal

Outputs

- Speed signal feedback

- Phase currents (percent)

- Frequency (percent)

2.7 Verification of Interface

- Vendor shall demonstrate functional testing and operational verification of the

control interface with the Building Management System via Modbus, Bacnet, LON,

or equal as required.

3.0 INSPECTIONS AND FACTORY TEST

Controllers shall be inspected at all stage of manufacture in accordance with the Seller’s

Quality Assurance Program and shall be completely assembled in the works. Seller shall

provide a production schedule, which shall give details of the production processes. Seller

shall provide a QA

Manual, which shall detail the inspections, testing to referenced standards, and burn in at

full load at an ambient of 50 °C, for a minimum of 8 hours. All deficiencies shall be

corrected before shipment.

All metal surfaces that are to be painted or coated shall be cleaned to an equal of a

commercial finish as defined in the Steel Structures Painting Council’s manual -

SSPC-SP6-63, modified to exclude wet sandblasting and painted to manufacturer’s

standard finish. Internal surfaces shall be painted white.

Nameplates shall be provided for each VFD controller.


MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE

Page 1 of 7

SECTION 6




Page 2 of 7

SECTION 6


Index

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 SPECIFICATIONS

3.0 INSPECTIONS AND FACTORY TESTS



Page 3 of 7

1 GENERAL

GENERAL INTRODUCTION

This Specification describes the requirements for 400 V motor control centres (MCC). The

motor control centres shall be designed and provided in accordance with this

Specification and the electrical schematic diagram.

The scope of supply includes the design, manufacture, installation, testing and

commisioning of the 400 V motor control centres as described above.

Equipment unloading and storage at the Job Site.

All equipment shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the

applicable IEC 439-1, EN 61439-1 form-3b, or form as shown as drawings, IEC 947-4, IEC

801 standards and shall meet the requirements of DEWA.

Dedicated MCC’s as mentioned on drawings for pumps shall be form-2, type-2 with

incomer MCCB (N/A) / Isolator.

All MCC’s shall be weather proof to IP-54.

Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents, acceptable

manufacturer of all materials specified in this section of types and sizes required, whose

products have been in satisfactory use under similar servicer conditions for not less than

five years.

The Motor Control Centres shall be capable of operating normally in an environment

with an ambient temperature range of 0°C to 50°C with relative humidity of up to 95%

(non-condensing). The enclosed current rating shall be derated by 10% for each 5°C

above 50°C not exceeding 60°C.

The MCC shall be capable of being shipped and stored in an environment with an

ambient temperature range of 0°C to 65°C.

The normal operating altitude shall be less than 1000 m above sea level.

2 Specifications

The MCC technical requirements shall be in accordance with the data sheets,

single line diagrams and schematics

The motor control centres shall be suitable for operation on 400 V, 3-phase, 3 wire,

50 Hz, front mounted, installed on steel channel sills.

All power bus bars as well as all other current carrying parts shall be of copper.

The main horizontal bus bars shall be insulated and isolated, and rated as

indicated in single line diagrams, and shall run continuously the entire length of the

control centre, except when it may be necessary to cut and provide splice plates

as between shipping sections. The main bus shall be housed in an isolated

compartment. Vertical bus bars extending the full height of each section shall be

provided. The vertical bus shall be insulated with flame-retardant material. All



Page 4 of 7

buses shall be braced for 50,000 symmetrical amps RMS short circuit current. All

bus assemblies shall be supported by steel framework with insulators of moulded

glass polyester. Provision shall be made to extend MCC on either side.

Motor control centres shall have a continuous horizontal copper earthing bus

installed in the bottom of the MCC. It shall extend through each section of the

control centre and shall be provided with compression lugs at each end. Vertical

ground bus extending down each vertical section shall also be provided.

Incoming sections shall have top entry. Space shall be adequate to

accommodate incoming bus ducts supplied by others. MCC Supplier shall

coordinate with the main contractor regarding details of bus ducts.

Outgoing power and control wiring shall be from top.

Each control centre shall be provided with a laminated phenolic nameplate,

white outer layers with black centre layer, 75 mm x 200 mm, with bevelled edges.

Lettering shall be engraved into the phenolic to produce black letters on a white

background. The MCC number shall be in 25 mm high letters and numerals. All

other lettering shall be a minimum of 10 mm high. Tabreed equipment and

purchase number shall be engraved on the nameplate. The nameplates shall be

firmly fixed to the MCC’s.

Vertical Sections

- Each motor control centre shall consist of one or more rigid free standing

vertical section(s) bolted together to form a unit assembly.

- Sections shall be suitable for mounting starters in front of the section.

-

- Vertical sections shall be front connected and be capable of being wired

from the front without removing any units. Adequate vertical wiring

space accessible from the front shall be provided in a separate vertical

isolated wireway, with covers.

-

- Openings, covered by removable gasketted plates, shall be provided in

ends of vertical sections to allow for future addition of vertical sections at

either end. Removable plates shall also be used to cover the top and

any unused space on the front and back of the control centres. Where

called for in specific requirements, space shall be provided for

installation of future units. This space shall be complete with bus, unit

supports and isolating barriers.

Unit Compartments

Each control unit shall be designed for mounting within a vertical section in such a

manner that each unit will be completely enclosed and isolated from all other

units. Adequate space shall be provided for entry of wiring from the vertical wiring

trough. Control units shall be “plug in” type construction, equipped with self-

aligning stabs of a type that will increase contact pressure on short circuits.

Control units shall be capable of independently and satisfactorily clearing a fault

on the load side of the starter with 42,000 symmetrical amperes available at the

line side terminals.



Page 5 of 7

Each unit compartment shall be provided with an individual front door. Starters

and feeder unit doors shall be interlocked mechanically with the unit disconnect

device to prevent unintentional opening of the door with power on and

unintentional application of power while the door is open.

Means shall be provided for releasing the interlock for intentional application of

power, if desired, while the door is open. Padlocking arrangements shall permit

locking of the disconnect device in the OFF position with a maximum of 3

padlocks with the door closed or open.

Starter disconnect devices shall be operable from outside the enclosure and shall

show position of disconnect device whether compartment door is opened or

closed.

Similar nameplates showing unit location I.D. shall be installed at left top corner of

front door of each unit.

Special tools and equipment shall be provided for operation and maintenance

purposes.

STARTERS, DISCONNECT AND ACESSORIES

Motor starters shall be in accordance with this specification. The maximum starting

currents for motors shall be:

- Less then 10 hp –5 times full load current

- 10 hp to 50 hp -2 times full load current

- 50 hp and above -1.5 times full load current

The stationary equipment shall be as follows:

Motors up to 10 hp will be connected Across-The-Line with over current protection

Motors 10 hp and above shall be controlled with motor starters of a soft start

design.

Provide moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) for feeders with current limiting

protection as indicated on single line diagrams. The rating of the MCCB’s shall be

in accordance with the load indicated on the single line diagrams with a minimum

of 65kA interrupting capacity.

ACROSS-THE-LINE STARTING

Controllers shall be of circuit breaker combination type with full voltage magnetic

starters for across-the-line starting. Full protection of each phase shall be provided

in starters by means of electronic overloads.

Undervoltage protection shall be provided by the starter coil to disengage on 65%

of rated voltage unless otherwise noted.



Page 6 of 7

ELECTRONIC OVERLOAD RELAY

Vendor shall provide an electronic overload relay for connecting the starter.

The overload relay shall have a current adjustment range of 5:1 or greater.

The overload relay shall have +/- 2.5% setting accuracy.

The overload relay can be converted from manual to automatic reset.

The overload relay trips in two seconds or less under phase loss conditions when

applied to fully loaded motor.

The overload relay provides a visible trip indicator.

The overload relay provides led status indication.

The trip indication LED flashed in a pattern that indicates the trip cause.

The overload relay provides 1 N.C. auxiliary contact.

The overload relay provides a test trip function that when operated trips both the

N.C. contacts and the N.O. triac outputs.

The overload relay has trip free construction

The overload relay is ambient temperature compensated

The overload relay has user selectable 10, 15, 20 or 30 tripping classes

The overload relay has user selectable jam/stall protection.

The overload relay has user selectable ground fault protection.

The overload relay is compatible with a hand-held or panel-mounted interface

device that provides a two-line Bakelite LCD and start, stop and reset control

functions.

The overload relay can communicate on an open communications bus.

The overload relay provides the following information on a communication

network.

- Average Current

- Percent Phase Imbalance

- Percent Thermal Capacity Used

- Trip Cause

- Full load Current Setting

- Output Triac Status



Page 7 of 7

The overload relay provides two triac outputs that enable the overload to control

two starter coils.

The overload relay provides the following control functions on a communication

network.

- Start

- Stop

- Reset

Variable Frequency Drives

Vendor shall provide variable frequency drives (VFD) for applications that require

varying the speed of squirrel cage motors as indicated on single line diagrams.

The VFD shall be as detailed in Section 5.

Power Correction Capacitors

Refer Section 7 for details.

3 INSPECTIONS AND FACTORY TESTS

MCC’s shall be inspected at each stage of manufacture in accordance with the

Vendor’s quality assurance program and shall be completely assembled in the

works. All deficiencies shall be corrected before shipment. Seller shall advise the

Consultant 5 (five) working days before completion and before testing

commences to Consultant, if required, to make arrangements to witness the

inspection(s) and tests.

MCC’s shall be tested in the manufacturer’s works in accordance with the

referenced standards. Tests to include:

- Routine functional tests.

- Insulation (Megger) and hi-pot of wiring.


POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS,

REGULATORS AND HARMONIC FILTERS

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 7

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND HARMONIC FILTERS




Page 2 of 4

SECTION 7

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND HARMANIC FILTERS

INDEX

1.0 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS & REGULATORS

2.0 HARMONIC FILTERS, SURGE ARRESTORS

3.0 HARMONIC ANALYSIS




Page 3 of 4

1.0 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS & REGULATORS

These shall be provided as per DEWA requirements.

The power factor correction capacitor shall comply with the relevant BS and IEC

Standard and shall be double insulated dry type with self – healing metalized

polypropylene film dielectric with low losses to IP 545 and shall incorporate a discharge

resistance and harmonic filters. An overpressure disconnector switch shall be fitted on

each capacitor as an additional safety measure. Capacitors shall have aluminium

housing and be detuned to below 3rd harmonics.

Capacitance variation due to ambient temperature shall be taken into consideration

and the capacitors shall be derated to give the required capacitance at 50 deg. C.

Capacitors shall be protected by circuit-breakers and wired through cables with

capacity of 1.6 times the capacitor rating.

Where multi steps capacitor bank is used the power factor shall be maintained at a set

value indicated by the reactive power regulator which shall control the opening and

closing of the capacitor switching contactors. Number of capacitors to be connected

through the regulator, in the event of Power failure or when the Power is restored, shall

be in accordance with the System reactive power.

The high inrush current due to capacitor switching shall be taken into consideration by

using fast acting contactor designed for capacitor switching and which shall be able to

handle 100 times the rated current. In addition to that, the cable connecting the

contactor to the busbar shall be installed in a way that self inductance is produced e.g.

by coiling the cable into necessary number of loops along the cable run.

Capacitor shall be designed and constructed to with stand any harmonic currents if

existing and additional filters shall be provided to withstand harmonic currents.

The capacitor panel supply shall be by means of isolating switch with door interlocking

device. Each bank of capacitors shall be controlled by its own contactor , sized for the

capacitive load and a set of three HRC fuses . Choke coils shall be provided which

protect the capacitor banks from switch on inrush currents. The electronic regulator,

indicator lamps for mains on, banks on, auxiliary circuits on, Auto-Off- manual switches

for each bank shall be mounted on the front of the panel.

Capacitors shall meet the requirements of EN 60831-1/2 and its reliability shall be

recognized by the mark UL810. Capacitors shall generally be of cylindrical aluminium

case equipped with M12 bottom fixing stud. Capacitors shall be fixed with overpressure

disconnector and discharge resistor. Temperature category: -25/+50 deg. celcius. PCB

dielectrics shall not be used.

An Electronic regulator shall be provided to control the switching on and off of the banks

of capacitors. It shall work with a current signal 0.5 and 5Amps and return to zero for

absence in voltage. It should be equipped with display facilities for Volts, amp on the CT

secondary and power factor.

Capacitors shall shut off incase of generator operation.




Page 4 of 4

2.0 HARMONIC FILTERS AND SURGE ARRESTORS

Surge Arrestors shall be provided for each Main LV MDB panels.

The harmonic levels as specified for harmonics generating equipment like VFD’s, UPS

etc. shall be complied with. Total harmonic level in the system shall not exceed 5% of

the system voltage.

Harmonic in the system shall be analysed by Contractor after energizing and switching

on the loads. If active filters are required, Contractor shall submit three proposals within

prices which shall be considered as an additional cost under PC sum.

Harmonic study shall be included as part of the contract.

3.0 HARMONIC ANALYSIS

An harmonic analysis shall be performed based on an approximation method for

evaluating total harmonic distortion (THD) voltage at the point of common coupling

(PCC), defined to be on the secondary side of the utility supply transformer. The analysis

shall take into account other devices connect on the same mains network.

In installation where harmonic current may affect sensitive equipment, the AC Drive

manufactured shall provide an automatic adaptable harmonics compensator to cope

with permanent modification of harmonic contents.

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B -SECTION 8

CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER,

FITTINGS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT

Page 1 of 7

SECTION 8

CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS

AND CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM




Page 2 of 7

SECTION 8

CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS

AND CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INDEX

1.0 CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES

2.0 FLEXIBLE CONDUITS

3.0 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

4.0 GENERAL WIRING TRUNKING

5.0 CABLE TRAYS/CABLE LADDERS

6.0 DADO TRUNKING / SKIRTING TRUNKING

7.0 SERVICE OUTLET BOXES

8.0 WIRE BASKETS




Page 3 of 7

1.0 CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES

All conduits embedded in concrete, plaster and screed unless otherwise specified shall be

extra heavy wall black PVC and shall conform to BS 4607. All exposed conduits shall be

heavy gauge, welded, screwed and galvanized steel in accordance with BS 4508.

PVC Conduits shall be black of the extra heavy wall with 1.8mm minimum thickness for

20mm dia conduit.

Steel conduits shall be of the heavy gauge galvanized steel, welded and screwed type

zinc coated, hot dipped galvanized both inside and outside.

All set, fixing and wood screws used throughout the installation shall be brass.

Accessories mounting box shall be provided with brass earth terminal and shall be supplied

with adjustable steel grids.

Conduit boxes for steel conduit systems shall be malleable iron with screwed spout outlets,

blind cover fixing holes, galvanized and water proof with external lugs where required.

Each steel conduit thread shall be given a coat of aluminium paint upon completion of

conduit installation.

All circular PVC boxes where used to support lighting fittings shall be provided with steel

insert clips.

The sizes of the conduits for all wiring shall be in accordance to IEE regulations and DEWA

Standards and shall be such that a cable can be withdrawn and another drawn in without

disturbing the remainder. However, the size of the conduit shall not be less than 20mm

where used for lighting and power circuits and 25mm for telephone / data wiring.

2.0 FLEXIBLE GI CONDUITS

PVC sheathed and watertight Flexible metal conduits, shall be provided between the

conduit system and electrical motors or other apparatus subject to vibration. They shall be

complete with brass double female adaptors and will be soldered to either end of all

flexible conduits and connected to solid conduit entries using smooth bore male brass

bushes.

Earth continuity through flexible conduits shall be provided by a separate earth continuity

conductor, sized in accordance with BS Standards. The brass adaptor specified above

shall be drilled so that the earth wire can be brought out at each end. The earth wire shall

be soldered at each end to the brass adaptors or alternatively connected to a substantial

earth terminal.

3.0 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

All joints in PVC conduits, other than screwed joints, shall be cemented with a waterproof

adhesive. This adhesive shall be as recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

Screwed connections between steel conduits and accessories shall be screwed up tight,

where coupled by a socket the conduit ends shall butt together; running joints shall be

provided with back nuts which shall be screwed up tight.

PVC conduits shall be saddled at a minimum of 1 metre intervals. All saddles, tubes and

boxes must be in perfect alignment to avoid any appearance of warping when the




Page 4 of 7

installation is complete. Saddles should not be so tight as to prevent expansion of the

conduit.

Steel conduits run on the surface shall be secured with galvanized saddles spaced not

more than 2 metres apart.

All saddles for steel conduits shall be of the distance type. Spacer bar type saddles will

NOT be permitted.

All ceiling boxes concealed in ceiling slabs or voids above false ceilings shall finish flush with

the underside of the ceiling and all necessary extension or break joint rings shall be

provided and fitted.

Steel conduits which finish at boxes or other equipment without smooth bore spouts shall

be fitted with smooth bore bushes, the inside diameter of which shall be equal to the bore

of the conduit. The junction shall be made by means of a male to female threaded socket

bearing on the outside of the box and into which shall be screwed from the inside of the

box a hexagon smooth bore male bush.

Plain or inspection elbows, or tees, will not be permitted and the number and position of

boxes and sizes of conduits shall be arranged to permit the cable being drawn-in easily

after all conduits have been erected. Stock bends below 38 mm diameter will not be

allowed; all such bends shall be formed out of the conduit at Site to suit the local

conditions. Sets and bends shall be made without indentation and the bore shall remain

full and free throughout.

Conduits shall not be run closer than 0.15m to any steam or hot water pipes and shall be

run underneath such pipes rather than over them. The conduits shall not be run closer than

0.05m to any telephone, bell or other signalling circuit.

No wiring or drawn-in wires, cables or wires of any description are to be drawn into the

conduits until the section of the conduit system involved is complete.

A separate conduit and wiring system is to be provided for each installation i.e. lighting

general purpose sockets, power, telephone, etc.

Drawn-in boxes must be provided to give access to all conduit for the drawing-in or out of

any cable after the installation is completed and should not be spaced more than 9m on

straight runs. On runs with not more than two right angle bends the spacing between

draw-in boxes shall not exceed 7m.

Not more than two right angle bends shall be installed between boxes. Conduits shall not

be laid to falls, but the Contractor shall exercise care to ensure that no pockets are formed

within the conduit system in which water can collect. Drainage holes shall not be

provided.

In floors which are in direct contact with the earth or under which unheated foundation

voids are situated, conduits shall not be laid to form traps in which moisture can collect.

Where it is impossible to arrange for drainage to a lower level such floors shall be avoided

altogether and the conduit shall be run in the floor above with drops to socket outlets and

other low level points.

Embedded conduits shall be fixed in position by crumpets or such other means of fixing as

shall be necessary to ensure that they remain rigidly in structure or finishes.




Page 5 of 7

Where steel conduits enter sheet steel wiring trunking, iron clad gear or junction or similar

boxes, the junction shall be made by means of a flanged coupling with lead washer

bearing on the outside of the box and into which shall be screwed from the inside of the

box a hexagon smooth bore brass male bush of heavy pattern.

Where PVC conduits connects to any sheet steel wiring trunking, steel clad switchgear and

the like, these shall be connected to the PVC conduit system with female thread to plain

push-in adaptors with a male bush or with male thread to plain push-in adaptors with

locking ring as may be required.

Steel conduits which do not finish at boxes with smooth radiused inside spouts shall be

fitted with smooth bore bushes, the inside diameter of which shall be equal to the bore of

the conduit.

Where conduits cross a building expansion joint due allowance shall be made in the

design of the run with an approved expansion joint.

All screwed joints for conduits and fittings erected in the open air, damp situations and

plant room shall be made water-tight by the application of a suitable metallic paint and

conduit boxes being fitted with rubber gasket. Separate earth continuity conductors will

be installed within the normal circuit wiring.

The conduit system shall be such that 'cross-overs' are reduced to a minimum and runs shall

be located to avoid holes in the floor slabs required for other services.

Particular care shall be taken to ensure that no grout or other foreign materials enters the

conduit system through joints, or through surface openings. Screw holes in boxes must be

kept entirely free and clean. After screeding, compressed air is to be blown through the

conduit system to ensure that it is clean and a steel draw wire of adequate size to be

pulled through to ascertain that no obstruction is adhering to the inside of the conduits.

Draw wires shall be left in all conduit runs for other services not included in the contract.

4.0 GENERAL WIRING TRUNKING

Cable trunking, ducting and fittings should comply with BS 4678 Standards. All cable

trunking accessories such as bends, tees, cable retainer, cable separators, reducer and

support shall be supplied from the manufacturers standard product range. Site fabricated

accessories shall not be acceptable.

Cable trunking shall be of sheet steel fabrication, galvanized to with heavy protection both

inside and outside. The access plate of the trunking shall be removable in easily-handled

sections over the entire length of straight runs. Overlapping collar sections or other similar

approved linking arrangement shall be provided at the junction of the various sections of

the trunking.

All fixings shall be so arranged that there are no projecting screw threads or similar points

within the trunking which may cause damage to the cables. The section of the trunking

shall not be so changed at deviations from the straight as to decrease the cross- sectional

area.

Positive continuity links shall be supplied and fixed at all trunking section interconnection

points.




Page 6 of 7

Cable trunking shall not be installed to expose to other mechanical stress except the loads

associated in carrying cables.

Spacing of supports for cable trunking shall be as recommended by the standards,

supports shall be positioned within 300 mm of each bend or fittings.

A calculation for the space factor shall be forwarded for approval and the trunking shall

be sized accordingly.

5.0 CABLE TRAYS/CABLE LADDERS

Cable tray and cable ladder shall be produced to BS 729 and shall be hot dip galvanized.

Prefabricated mild steel cable trays shall be constructed of steel and finished hot dipped

galvanized. All trays supporting power cables shall be folded edge heavy duty tray with

return flange and those supporting fire alarm and telephone cables shall be medium duty.

Sheet steel thickness for cable trays shall be as indicated hereunder for the different sizes

and types:

- Heavy Duty : 100mm to 300mm 1.5mm

450mm to 600mm 2.0mm

Cable trays, bends and junctions shall be provided as necessary and shall be similar type

and finish. The trays shall be of adequate widths to support the necessary cables. They

shall be adequately supported throughout the length or run at intervals not exceeding

1200 mm. All cables shall be fixed to the cable tray utilising cable ties. Ventilated covers

shall be provided for all cable trays exposed to direct sunlight.

Cable ladder shall be produced of 2mm hot dipped galvanized mild steel.

Only 40% of the cable tray and the cable ladder space shall be occupied. Cable tray size

calculations shall be forwarded for approval and the tray size shall be increased, if

required, to meet the above without any extra cost.

6.0 SKIRTING / DADO TRUNKING

The trunking shall be provided as per the requirements of BS 4678 partly and BS 4662. The

uPVC trunking shall be either installed skirting level or DADO level as shown on drawings.

The system shall comply with all relevant requirements of 16th edition of wiring regulations

and structured cabling Standards.

All corridors, extension corridors, covers, and cable dividers shall be extruded. Corners,

corner covers, stop ends cover seals and accessory boxes must be formed by injection

moulding.

It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide a proper arrangement and installation

of the system to engineers requirements and all necessary interconnecting junction

boxes, risers, joints etc to be provided.

The trunking cover shall be uPVC to incorporate all outlets.

Sizes of Trunking shall be as shown on drawings with two / three compartments, for

power and voice / data.

Sockets shall be from the same manufacturer of trunking flush with the cover. Voice

data outlets shall be supplied under structured cabling contract. Back box and face

plate shall be provided by the skirting system vendor.




Page 7 of 7

Backboxes shall be provided as required for conduit drops.

Refer detailed specifications in Medical Services Installation (Part A – Section 10) for

service panels / bed head units.

7.0 SERVICE OUTLET BOX

Service outlet boxes shall be two-compartment type of the size 300x 300 x75-90mm

and shall be constructed from high-pressure Zinc Alloy die casting base frame pillars.

This shall be fixed on to heavy gauge galvanized steel base plate for support by

support frame. Other materials adequate in strength and performance shall be

used and these shall be protected against corrosion. The boxes shall be constructed

with provisions for ducting or conduit access on all four sides. Unwanted entries shall

be blanked off with detachable side blanks.

Covers for service outlet boxes shall be made of high pressure Zinc Alloy die casting

with 12mm recess to receive ceramic tiles or carpet tiles. They shall be lifted by

suction cups as and when required giving access at all times to the power,

telephone and ELV outlets. Counter sunk screws shall secure the covers of service

boxes. All exposed portions of the boxes shall be epoxy coated in grey color.

All boxes shall have extra wide gaskets in order to minimize water seepage. Gaskets

shall be made of material that is durable in order to withstand loads.

All boxes shall be adjustable in height to take account of difference in floor

thickness.

Cables emerging from service boxes shall be protected against damage by means

of nylon cable exit grommets or equivalent and approved material and shall be

reversible to close position when not in use.

Circuit protective conductors shall be provided between the covers and the boxes.

The boxes shall be adequate in strength to take in a ceramic tile, and withstand

loads normally seen in airports and pubic locations.

8.0 STEEL WIRE BASKETS

Baskets shall be constructed from 5mm steel wires. The spacing between longitudinal

wires shall be 50mm and between transverse wires 100mm. The steel wires shall be

welded at all joints. Transverse wires shall be “T“ welded to top edge longitudinal wires in

such a way so as to minimise fraying of the cables when being laid.

The steel wire baskets shall be Electro-Zinc galvanized and corrosion resistant.

Wire baskets shall be minimum 50mm high and, 150mm / 200mm / 300mm / 400mm /

wide as may be specified elsewhere or as shown in layout drawings.

INSTALLATION

Steel wire baskets shall be installed as shown in layout drawings as per manufacturer’s

instructions. Installation shall be carried out only after obtaining approval of

representative samples of baskets & accessories from the Engineer.

Purpose made accessories such as couplers, brackets & supports, fittings, dividers &

covers as may be specified else where, only shall be used for the installation of wire

baskets. All accessories shall be so constructed so as to permit easy and quick assembly

and installation.

Equipotential earth bonding shall be carried out as per manufacturer‘s

recommendations.


SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 1 of 8

SECTION 9

SYSTEM OF WIRING


SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 2 of 8

SECTION 9

SYSTEM OF WIRING

INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 TEMPORARY WIRING

3.0 CABLE

4.0 CABLE INSTALLATION

5.0 FLEXIBLE FIRE RESISTANT CABLES


SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 3 of 8

1.0 GENERAL

Unless otherwise specified all wires and cables enclosed in conduits or trunking or the like,

shall be single core LSF insulated 450/750/V grade and the installation shall be carried out

on the looping-in system with continuous mains throughout each circuit. All connections to

fittings and the like shall be of a solid nature and small connectors (other than porcelain

enclosed heavy brass sleeves) will not be allowed. Porcelain connectors enclosing heavy

brass sleeves shall be provided for heat resisting trails for enclosed fittings and for the drops

for pendant type fittings.

All connections to flexible cords or cables shall be such that any strain on the cord or cable

is not transmitted to the connections.

All wires/cables connections to switches, socket, circuit breaker etc. shall be carried out

using suitable swivel lugs or cable ends.

Joints in the PVC wiring cables will not be allowed in any part of the system

The number of cables run in conduits shall be in accordance with the IEC – wiring

regulations and DEWA Regulations. With the exception of 3 phase power points or sub

main supply circuits to 3 phase boards the circuits grouped in any one conduit shall be

connected to one phase of the system only. This does not apply to wiring run in metal

trunking.

All switch wires for lighting circuits shall be on the 'live' side.

When drawing the wires and cables into the conduits or trunking, the Contractor must see

that proper appliances are used so that the wires and cables suffer no damage whatever

in the process. All kinks must be rigidly avoided and care must be taken to ensure that the

insulation, taping and brading of the cables receive no damage or abrasion.

During the progress of work or at completion, the engineer may require certain wires and

cables to be drawn out in order to test that the conditions mentioned have been

complied with. They may require that certain fittings and/or accessories be dismantled for

examination of workmanship and quality.

The final subcircuit connection and wiring shall be carried out in accordance with DEWA

regulations and unless otherwise indicated, the following details shall apply throughout the

works :-

a) Lighting Circuits up to 1000 Watts:

10 amp MCB protection Wired with 3 x 4.0mm2 LSF / SC cables.

b) Lighting Circuits 1200 to 1800 watts:

15 amp MCB protection Wired with 3 x 4.0mm2 LSF / SC cables.

c) 13 amp socket outlets:

20 amp MCB protection on radial main basis wired with 3x4 mm2 LSF / SC cable

shall be provided for upto four socket outlets serving one room only of less than 50

Sq. meters floor area.


SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 4 of 8

32 amp MCB protection on ring main basis wired with 4 x 4mm2 and 2 x 4mm2 LSF /

SC cables shall be provided for maximum 8 nos. 13 A sockets.

d) Fixed Medical Equipment.

20 amp MCB protection Wired with 2 x 4mm2 and 1 x 4mm2 LSF / SC cables.

e) Fan coil units each / VAV Units.

20 amp MCB protection wired with 2 x 4mm2 and 1 x 4mm2 LSF / SC cables.

The above details for connections shall apply throughout the Works, except where the

related Regulations would be contravened in respect of permissible voltage drop. In such

cases the contractor shall utilize a larger conductor size as appropriate.

2.0 TEMPORARY WIRING

No part of the new installations shall be connected temporarily to the Supply Authority's

mains without the approval of the Engineer and the Authority.

All temporary lighting and electric wiring which the Contractor may require, must be

provided by the Contractor who will be responsible for all charges for electricity consumed

as stated in the Contract conditions.

Temporary wiring and connections executed by the contractor to the instructions of the

Engineer shall be arranged in accordance with the IEE regulations. Where the ambient air

temperature is in excess of 50 deg.C. heat resisting silicon rubber cables shall be used for

temporary connection. Where such cables may be subject to mechanical damage they

shall be protected by conduit.

3.0 CABLE

All cables supplied and installed shall be selected shall be LSF / Fire proof types with

stranded copper conductors and shall comply with the appropriate British Standard

referred to below as applicable.

(i) LSF insulated wiring cables

non-armoured 450/750V grade BS. 6491.

(ii) LSF insulated steel wire

armoured LSF sheathed cables 600/1000V grade BS. 6346.

(iii) XLPE insulated steel wire armoured

LSF sheathed multi-core cables 600/

1000 V grade. BS. 5467.

(iv) LS ZH cables BS. 6724.

(v) Fire resistant cables BS. 4066 Part-1

IEC–332 & BS 6387

Category CWZ


SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 5 of 8

(vi) Flexible cables

a) single core LSF insulated

non sheathed cables. BS. 6004.

b) cables for wiring of luminaires BS. 4533.

(vii) MICC Cables BS 5750

(viii) Control cables XLPE and LSF insulated 600 / 1000V BS 5467 BS 6346

Cable specification and manufacture must be consistent throughout each wired system.

All cable utilised must be continuously run from source to termination, without any through

jointing included.

Cable must be adequately stored and protected from damage pending installation and

also during installation until permanent protection is effected.

Cable reels must be supported on purpose formed support frames and under no

circumstance shall cable be drawn from reels laid on the ground. This shall be strictly

enforced as the Engineer's condemnation of any cable that is considered to have been

abused will involve total replacement at cost to the Contractor.

The cross sectional area of every cable shall be suitable for carrying the maximum

sustained load current under normal conditions and shall be selected in accordance with

related Regulations. The cross sectional area of the neutral conductor for 3-phase circuits

shall be equal to the cross sectional area of the phase conductors. The cables shall be

selected such that the drop in voltage from the origin of the installation to any point in the

installation does not exceed 4% of the nominal voltage when the conductors are carrying

the full load current, but disregarding starting conditions. Voltage drop calculation shall be

submitted for approval and the cross sectional area of the cable shall be increased

accordingly if required to meet the above mentioned requirement without any extra cost.

The cables connected in parallel shall be of the same type, cross sectional area, length

and disposition and be arranged so as to carry substantially equal load currents.

Where cables are to be connected to bus bars, breakers etc. The insulation and/or sheath

shall be removed for a distance of 150mm from the connection and replaced by suitable

heat-resisting insulation.

The wire armour of single core cables in the same circuit shall be bounded together at

both ends.

4.0 CABLE INSTALLATION

The installation of cables shall conform to IEC regulations and DEWA requirements.

All cables shall be protected against any risk of mechanical damage to which they may

be liable in normal conditions, of service. Where cables are installed under floors or in

ceiling voids, they shall be run so that they are not liable to be damaged by contact with

the floor or the ceiling or their fixings. Where the cables passes through holes in metal work,

care shall be taken to prevent abrasion of the cables on any sharp edges.


SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 6 of 8

All cables rising through floors and trench covers shall be protected, for example, by a

length of lead or steel or PVC pipe which should project at least 75mm above the finished

surface level. The open end of the pipe shall be sealed with a suitable compound. Lead

and PVC pipes shall be used where they will be free from mechanical damage or in

situations where steel pipe would be subject to corrosion.

The cables installed throughout the system shall be enclosed in conduit, duct, ducting or

trunking as specified.

All cables buried in the ground shall incorporate an armour and all cables installed in

positions which may be exposed to direct sunlight shall be supported by heavy duty cable

tray and shall be suitably covered by a standard ventilated stand and non perforated

cover to protect from ultra-violet light.

Cable ties shall be utilised to fix cables into cable trays, cable separator and cable retainer

shall be utilized to fix cables into cable trunking.

All conduits, ducting and trunking shall be properly supported and of a type suitable for

any type of mechanical damage to which they may be liable in normal conditions of

service or adequately protected against such damage. The internal radius of every bend

of a non-flexible cable shall be as recommended by manufacturer and the related

standards.

Cables under roads, and where deemed necessary under pipe tracks etc., shall be

protected by concrete encased PVC ducts. Bitumen bonded fibre ducts shall not be used

under any circumstances. Conduit buried in trenches or in the ground is not permitted.

Where existing cable sleeves are to be utilised, the contractor shall ensure that the lower

most ducts are employed, thereby leaving any remaining ducts accessible for future use.

Cable ducts shall be sealed at both ends using materials that are not soluble in

hydrocarbons, and that are resistant to any likely corrosive and insect attack in the area

concerned.

Fire Barriers

Where conduit, ducting and/or trunking pass through fire-resistant structural elements such

as walls and floors designated as fire barriers, the openings made shall be sealed

according to the appropriate degree of fire resistance. In addition to this external fire

barrier, an internal fire-resistant barrier shall also be provided to prevent the spread of fires.

Cables Installed Underground

Direct buried cables shall be bedded in 75mm of clean sand or riddled soil, covered with

similar material, then protected by concrete slabbing or interlocking tiles. The trench shall

be backfilled over a plastic identification tape laid for as detailed under cable and cable

trench marking.

Prefabricated concrete troughs or preformed trenches in which cables are laid shall be

filled with clean sand to provide the top layer of cables with a minimum of 75mm cover, or

be completely filled with sand if this should be required by circumstances.

Prefabricated cable troughs, partly or wholly filled with sand shall be closed using

prefabricated concrete covers. Such covers shall be provided, by the contractor, to meet


SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 7 of 8

any particular load bearing requirements but shall not be less than adequate for use as a

footpath.

Preformed trenches shall be sand filled and closed by floating over with concrete of

adequate strength and thickness.

The use of chequer plating and other materials for closing cable troughs, trenches etc.,

shall be confined to those conditions where such special treatment is fully justified

technically and economically and shall be agreed by the Engineer.

Power cables operating at voltages of 415 volts and above shall not be routed below

'jacked-up' typed unfixed flooring systems in any internal area unless unavoidable for the

purpose of supplying equipment installed on the flooring system. In such cases the power

cables must be totally enclosed within a steel trunking, conduit, etc., over their entire route

length below the flooring system irrespective of the type of cable used.

Cable trench and prefabricated trough depths should not normally have less than 500mm.

Direct buried cables should not normally have less than 500mm of cover from cable to

finished grade level. The above shall be varied according to the requirements of actual

site conditions and cable routes to provide adequate safeguard against, for example,

erosion, soft ground conditions and mechanical damage etc. The maximum thickness of

any one group of cables shall not exceed 75mm unless otherwise agreed with the

Engineer.

Cable Sheath of External Buried Cables

All cables directly buried in external areas should have MDPE (medium density

polyethylene) outer sheath other characteristics of external cables shall be similar to XLPE

insulated cables.

Cable in Duct

All external cables shall be laid in 150mm dia UPVC underground ducts of 3.2mm wall

thickness.

Cable and Cable Trench Marking

All cables shall be fitted with indestructible identification bands at each end and then over

their entire length at 30 metre intervals, at all points where they enter and leave ducts, and

at changes in direction, etc.

Concrete or slabs covering cable trenches shall be coloured for identification purposes.

Similarly where cables run under floors, markers shall be employed to clearly define the

extent of the cable way over the entire route.

The route of underground electric cables shall be marked by permanent markers posts.

They shall be reinforced concrete units fitted with lead inserts bearing cable sizes and

references. The marker post shall extent above ground level or shall be flush with the final

ground level according to the site and Engineer's requirements. Two or more markers shall

be visible from any point on the route and markers shall be placed at any divergence from

the straight.

The location of all underground power cables shall be clearly identifiable throughout their

route length by means of a polyethylene board laid in the ground at 300mm above each


SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 8 of 8

cable. The board shall be coloured red and continuously marked, with black indelible

lettering of not less than 12mm high, to read the following message in both Arabic and

English:

"CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC CABLE 300 mm BELOW"

A sample of the polyethylene board shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior

to any cable laying works being carried out.

The cable trench as shown on the drawings between service block and main building

cable termination room shall be decided taking into consideration of laying all cables

within the trench in 3 or 4 layers on cable ladders with sufficient access space. The

crossing of other services through the trench must also be considered while deciding the

exact width and depth.

Jointing and Terminations

All cable conductor shall be fitted with a correctly sized cable socket or thimble and a

means of identification. The cable sockets may be of the sweated or crimped

compression types. If for the former the solder should have a melting point of not less than

185 deg.C and if for the latter they must be the appropriate tools as specified by the

manufacturers of the joint connectors. The cable terminations shall be made following the

positive identification of the conductors in accordance with the specified phase rotation

sequence.

Joints in cable are not allowed and shall not be carried out without the written approval

of the Engineer. Low tension cable joints shall incorporate compression type ferrules with

polyethylene tape insulation housed in a plastic joint box and sealed with cold pouring

resin fitting.

5.0 FLEXIBLE FIRE RESISTANT CABLES

Fire resistant cable shall have stranded (if installed in conduits within slab) plain

annealed copper conductors to BS 6360 with extruded silicone rubber insulation to BS

6899 and Aluminium/PVC laminate and PVC composite sheath with tinned copper

circuit protective conductor. The cable shall be manufactured and tested to BS

7629.1993. The conductors shall be solid if installed externally on any surface, and

clipped directly.

The cables shall be rated at 300/500V and shall be suitable for operation at sheath

temperature of 70 deg. C.

The cable shall comply with the flame retardant requirements of BS 4066: Part 1, and the

requirements of BS 6387, category CWZ and IEC-332. The cable shall be LSZH type.

The Fire resistant cables used for the wiring of Fire Alarm System and Central Emergency

Lighting System shall be laid in conduits embedded in slab or wall.


LIGHTING

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 10

LIGHTING


LIGHTING

Page 2 of 5

SECTION 10

LIGHTING

INDEX

1.0 LIGHTING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.0 EXTERNAL LIGHTING

3.0 SCHEDULE OF LIGHT FITTINGS


LIGHTING

Page 3 of 5

1.0 LIGHTING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Complete data sheets from the manufacturer shall be included in the submittal of each

luminaire.

Lighting equipment and lighting fixtures shall be as called for on plans by designated

symbols and type. Said equipment shall embody the highest standards of electrical and

mechanical design with maximum efficiency obtainable and all shall be subject to the

approval of the Engineer.

Furnish and install a full complement of all types of incandescent and discharge lamps

required in the fixtures installed throughout the complex.

All hangers, cables, supports, channels, frames and brackets of all kinds for safely erecting

this equipment in place, shall be furnished from the standard manufacturer's product

range and shall be erected in place under this Section.

Contractor shall protect all opening edge in gypsum false ceiling by a protection means to

engineer’s approval.

Each lighting fixture shall have a manufacturer's label affixed to it and shall comply with

the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.

Fixtures shall be wired with approved fixture wire. Each fixture shall be wired to a single

point with adequate slack for proper connections.

All fixtures shall be protected from damage during the installation and any broken fixtures,

globes, sockets, stems, and the like, shall be replaced with new parts, without additional

cost of the Employer.

The right to select other fixtures of the same quality, without additional cost to the Employer

is reserved by the Engineer regarding the shape of the lighting luminaire.

All lighting fixture shop drawings, cuts, etc., shall be complied and submitted in bound

brochures. All loose pages, sheets, clippings, etc., will not be accepted. Catalogue cuts

shall contain sufficient data to evaluate all properties of the fixtures submitted. If requested

a sample of proposal fixture shall be submitted.

The supply to lighting fittings mounted on or recessed into a false ceiling shall be effected

by means of a plug in type ceiling rose plug in type mounted on a conduit box within the

false ceiling space with a three core heat resisting flexible cable connection. When fixtures

are surface mounted to the ceiling, ceiling rose shall be provided adjacent to the fixture.

All prismatic controllers for fluorescent fittings shall be of the injection moulded acrylic type

to obviate discoloration. Plastic diffusers will not be accepted.

When light fittings are installed in areas with plaster board false ceiling, supply wires shall be

directly terminated in the fitting with proper connectors. The wires shall be contained in

flexible conduits inside the ceiling void. The flexible conduit shall terminate at both ends

with proper adaptors.


LIGHTING

Page 4 of 5

2.0 EXTERNAL LIGHTING

Furnish and install external lighting fittings of the types specified and in the positions indicated

on the drawings. Check all requirements regarding conduit runs and positions and the casting

in of conduit.

The Contractor shall also be responsible for the installation and wiring of the external

lighting installation as shown on the drawing and in accordance with the schedule of light

fittings.

3.0 SCHEDULE OF LIGHT FITTINGS

Light Illumination

The lighting illumination shall be in compliance with Chartered Institute of Building Services

Engineering (CIBSE). The lux level shall be as follows:

S. No. Location Lux Remarks

1. Plant rooms 300

2. Reception Desk 500

3. Ward Corridors 200

4. Nurses station 500

5. Operating Theatres:

Special Lighting for the

operating table.

i. Operating table

(operation light)

50000 to

100000

ii. All other areas 500

6. Conference room 500

7. Staircase 200

8. Store, dirty room 200

9. Pantry 400

10 Consulting room 400

11 Observation 400

12 Laboratory 500

13 Treatment suit 400

14 X Ray 400

15 Examination room 400 General

1000 Local (Local examination

luminaire).

16 Maternity 400 General.

1000 Local (Local examination

luminaire).


LIGHTING

Page 5 of 5

S. No. Location Lux Remarks

17 Pharmacy 500

18 Library 500

19 Lift lobby 250

20 Loading bay 150

21 Kitchen/pantry 500

22 Car Parking 50

The contractor shall provide detailed lux level calculations for all areas to confirm the

performance of the selected light fittings for consultant/client approval.

Schedule

For light fitting details refer to electrical lighting drawings.


LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

Page 1 of 9

SECTION 11




Page 2 of 9

SECTION 11

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM -INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 CONTROL SYSTEM CONCEPT

3.0 CENTRAL CONTROL SOFTWARE

4.0 LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES

5.0 TIMERS

6.0 LIGHT SENSOR

7.0 LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS

8.0 INPUT CONTROL DEVICES

9.0 MOTION SENSOR, FLUSH MOUNTED



Page 3 of 9

1.0 General

The Programmable Lighting Management System shall be supplied, installed and

commissioned in accordance with the European Installation Bus – EiB technology.

The system shall also work as a stand-alone unit including timing functions incase of PC

failure and shall be programmable locally. Proposed system shall not have any bottle

neck or single source of failure. Proposal shall be based on a redundant system.

A two-wire bus cable shall link+ all sensors (push buttons, brightness sensors, motion

sensors, timers, etc.) and actuators (on/off controllers, dimming controllers, etc.) to each

other. The bus cable shall be a twisted pair, screened & shielded with solid conductors

and shall be capable of handling information exchange and supplying power to the bus

devices. The bus cable shall be laid in the building in the form of a linear, star or tree

structure similar to the power mains.

The system shall be completely de-centralized and programmable. The programming

shall be implemented via a high end PC located in BMS room and having access level

passwords. Any device in the system shall be accessed for programming from the PC

location without having to manipulate the device locally.

Each device in the system shall be addressable via a software programmable physical

address. Any device in the system shall communicate with any other device via software

programmable group addresses (telegrams). Each individual device will respond to only

those group addresses for which they are programmed to do so. There shall be an

EEPROM storing the physical address, group addresses & other software parameters for

every device, thus making it intelligent. No centralized processors or centralized memory

storage devices shall be permitted.

It shall be possible to program any of the devices on-line at the working site without

affecting any of the system devices or the system operation as well as off-line prior to

despatch of the material to site.

The entire system shall consist of bus lines each consisting of up to 64 devices. Two

consecutive lines shall be connected to each other via line couplers that act as network

filters and also provide communication between devices in different lines. In the event

of failure of a device in one line, only the control functions controlled by that device

shall be affected and the device failure report shall be printed out with the date and

time of failure.

The power supply module feeding power to the network shall consist of a built in back-

up power to compensate short voltage interruptions of upto 200 ms. This back-up power

shall enable the system to put all actuators in a fail-safe position (either on or off or as it

is) in the event of power failure.

The diagnostic modules shall scan the system for any faults in the bus wiring, failure of

any of the devices and generate reports displaying the physical address of non-

communicating devices.

The Lighting Management System shall also be integrated with the Building

Management System in automation layer so as to monitor and control the required



Page 4 of 9

circuits from the BMS workstation and hence to achieve a reliable system. EIB / C-bus

interface to be provided for total integration.

It is electrical Contractors scope and responsibility to re-arrange circuiting to achieve the

functionality of C-bus / EIB system as explained without any claims.

The following codes and standards to the extent specified herein, form a part of this

specification. When an edition date is not indicated for a Code or Standard the latest

edition enforce at the time of proposal submitted shall apply.

IEC 60947-4 Contactors

IEC 60947-5-1, IEC337-1,

IEC 60536 Indication lamps, Push buttons, switches

BSEN 60529

BSEN61439 Low voltage switchgear and control gear

BSEN 61008 Earth leakage circuit breakers

BSEN 60898 Miniature circuit breakers

BS7671 17TH Edition, IEE wiring regulations

2.0 CONTROL SYSTEM CONCEPT

The programmable lighting management and control system shall consist of following

levels of control.

The BMS shall be utilised for time based control and manual override by the BMS

operator. The EIB system shall be software interfaced with BMS and transfer all data to

BMS. The software shall consist of graphics based overview of the entire building, floors

and going up to the individual rooms. It shall have the necessary timer modules to

control the circuits in the form of various groups. It shall be possible to pre-program the

time channels in advance with special holiday programs, weekly programs, etc.

In the event the PC is not operational or is switched off, the standalone mode shall

control the lighting circuits as per programmed times. This shall be ensured via controllers

programmed with the same timer schedules as that of the central PC software.

A second level of standalone operation shall also be possible via local timer modules

capable of being programmed with switching times locally without the need to connect

a PC. 4-channels timer capable of being programmed with at-least 128 time schedules /

timer shall be provided for each network group of 64 devices to ensure this standalone

operation. This shall ensure that the system remains operational at all times in the auto

mode.

All other circuits which are controlled based on occupancy sensors, daylight, local

switches, etc. shall at all times be working in the standalone ‘Auto’ mode with monitoring

and override control possible from the central PC.

Lighting Control Concept



Page 5 of 9

All lighting shall be controlled such that unnecessary lights shall be switched ‘Off’ based

on occupancy and duty hours. Also lights redundant due to sufficient daylight shall be

switched ‘Off’ based on light sensor and time schedules.

The movement sensors shall have a built-in lux sensor with an adjustable set point so as

not to switch ‘On’ circuits even after detecting movement due to sufficient natural light.

There shall also be an adjustable ‘Off’ delay on the movement sensor from 1 sec to 16

min so as to ensure that circuits are not switched ‘Off’ immediately. Further, the

movement sensor shall incorporate a “manual-auto-off” switch for maintenance and

local override purpose.

Lighting control in different areas shall be as follows:

The scenes or requirements listed below must be programmable as per site requirements.

a) Car Parking

Lights connected to emergency circuit shall be ON all the time

Switch OFF all lights

Switch off 50% of drive way lights.

Parking bay On / Off and 50% on/off.

Ramp lights shall be kept “ON” during night time and shall be selectable.

Stair lights operated through push buttons and switch OFF after defined time.

b) Corridor, Lift Lobbies

Switch 50%, 50% lights based on occupancy.

Switch OFF all lights.

Switch On lights connected to Central Emergency Lighting System.

Movement sensor based operations.

c) External

Switch On / Off external lights in ground and roof floors, façade (elevation) lights,

signboards, etc. based on time lighting level (programmable) and season.

Switch On / Off external façade lights based on the requirements of façade

lighting Consultant. Complete façade lighting shall be controlled through

Lighting Control System as per lighting Consultant’s requirements.

Number of daylight / twilight sensors must be suitable to achieve the operation

and exact location to be decided at site. Contractor to include additional

sensors if required while commissioning proper coverage without any variation.



Page 6 of 9

A four channel timer device shall control circuits on a particular network group

(line) so as to have local standalone operation. It shall be possible to send signals

from a timer channel in one network to circuits in another network if

programmed to do so. This is to ensure that all timer channels are available for

control of all circuits in the system. Each timer shall be capable of being

programmed locally with at-least 128 timer programs for any of the four channels

combined together, without the need to connect a PC. Each of the four

channels shall have a manual push-button to over-ride the channel to ‘On’ or

‘Off’ irrespective of the time programs. In addition, each channel shall have a

‘Off-Auto-Manual’ switch for local over-ride purpose. The timer shall have a built-

in battery back-up to ensure that the timer is always operating even in the event

of power failure. This timer device shall be in addition to the PC software time

schedules to ensure uninterrupted stand-alone operation of the system at all

times.

e) Staircase lighting

All staircase lighting shall be controlled by timers and push button switches. Light

shall be turned ‘ON’ using the push button switches and shall be turned ‘OFF’

automatically after a pre determined time period which can be set using the

timer.

Separate timer control shall be provided for each group of lights such as facia

lighting, land scape lighting, water feature lighting, Walkway/road lighting, and

boundary wall lighting as applicable.

Actual time schedule for the various circuits shall be decided during

commissioning time and shall be to the approval of consultant.

f) Offices, Doctors’ Offices, Stores, Staff Lounges, Nurses Rooms, Examination /

Treatment Rooms, Multi-Purpose Rooms, sterilization, pharmacy, Outpatient

Clinics, Etc:

lighting control shall be by timer channels and override switch in the above

mentioned areas. lights in individual offices shall be turned on/off using the

intelligent switch during working hours, however the system switches shall be

overridden by timer schedules during non-working hours and on holidays in which

lights shall be turned off. Different application areas shall have separated timer

channels

g) Conference and Meeting Rooms

Lighting control shall be by timer channels and intelligent lighting control switch.

Lights in individual rooms shall be turned on/off using the intelligent switch during

working hours; however the system switches shall be overridden by timer

schedules during non-working hours and on holidays. Intelligent dimmer switches

for dimming the lighting during presentation

h) Wards Corridors

All lights connected to emergency power supply shall be on all the time. lights

connected to the power supply shall be on/off through programmable timer

channel, actual time schedule as per client requirements. Dedicated timer



Page 7 of 9

channel will be provided for wards corridor lighting. Intelligent switches shall be

provided at nurse station for the purpose of overriding

i) Entrance at Ground Floor

Lighting shall be switched on/off based on available daylight. A light value

switch capable of switching up to three lighting groups where each individual

channel has a separate switching set point shall be used. The brightness range of

the set points shall be adjustable from 2 to 2000 lux or 20 to 20000 lux as agreed

with the client at the time of commissioning. A light sensor shall be connected to

the switch to detect daylight.

3.0 CENTRAL CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

The software shall be same as used for BMS. EIB system shall be fully Software integrated

with BMS.

The software shall administer 255 access levels for 255 different user accounts to ensure

responsibility and accountability in the operation of the system.

The software shall provide customized graphics screens giving a full graphics display of

the entire building along with floorplans, partition layouts, circuit layouts in the individual

rooms, etc.

The software shall provide real time monitoring of the entire system and shall display

active status of each lighting circuit along with the run time hours and generate

maintenance schedules when the circuits have reached their threshold set-points for run

hours.

It shall be possible for the user to access any individual room for monitoring and

controlling the lighting circuits. The various screens shall be freely linked to each other

(“hyper-link principle”) or be reached by a navigator (“Quick-finder”).

Each circuit shall be graphically customized to contain operational characteristics

available in the system or by a link to an external database. This information shall be

displayed by passing the mouse cursor over the respective circuits (tip-strip mode).

The software shall have the interface to import and administrate graphics files having

standard formats such as Bitmap (BMP), Windows Metafile (WMF) and Enhanced

Metafile (EMF). Further, it shall be possible to add a huge variety of active elements to

these files for visualisation and easy understanding.

The software shall enable repeat interrogatory sweeps to be programmed through the

nigh or any other times to extinguish lighting which may have been left on locally.

The timer library in the software shall be programmable. It shall have the necessary timer

modules to control any of the circuits individually or in the form of groups which can be

selected and changed as and when desired. It shall be possible to pre-program the time

channels in advance with special holiday programs, weekly programs, etc. upto the

year 2040.



Page 8 of 9

4.0 LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES

The lighting control modules shall be DIN rail mounted consisting of four individually

programmable integral relays (contactors).

Each of these contactors shall be rated 10/20A A/AC3 together with a switch-on current

carrying capacity suitable for switching loads with high switch-on peaks. Additional

contactors shall not be used to control any of the lighting circuits.

The output states of each of the four relays shall be displayed on the front. Each of these

relays shall be latch-on type with manual operation (override) possible even without

power to the system.

In the event of power failure or bus wiring failure or control module failure, each of the

four relays shall attain a pre-programmed fail-safe position (‘On’, Off’ or ‘As it is’).

The control modules shall be capable of been programmed with different applications

to suit site requirements for e.g. staircase lighting function which switches ‘Off’ the relays

after a preprogrammed time from the time it has switched ‘On’. The application for

which a relay has been programmed shall apply irrespective of the signal from which it is

switched.

Each of the relays shall be capable of being programmed with its own ‘On’ and ‘Off’

delays which is applicable irrespective of the signal from which the relays are switched.

The control modules shall receive its operating power supply from the same bus cable

without any other power supply. It should not operate on any 220/240 V AC supply to

avoid possible fire hazards.

Each of the control module shall have its own individual address and shall be capable of

being programmed from the central PC for the purpose of changing parameters

without the need to access the module locally.

5.0 TIMERS

These devices should provide a 100-channel time function used to control, monitor and

schedule any devices on the system. A touch sensitive graphic user interface with

customised text should be provided. The device shall feature a scheduler on-board to

schedule events on the network. The device shall be used to monitor and control the

devices located on the network.

6.0 LIGHT SENSOR

Light level sensors: These devices are designed to measure lighting levels and

automatically generate messages onto the bus to regulate light levels within

defined limits. For indoor applications measuring range should be between 20 –

3000 lux. For out door applications, measuring range should be between 1 lux to

full sunlight. Lux level range and set points should be programmable, and the

sensor should be able to control any number of circuits connected to the bus.

Protection - IP 54 acc. DIN 40 050

Operating temperature range - 40°C to + 70°C



Page 9 of 9

Connection Lighting sensor - 3 screw terminals connection cross section 0.5 – 1.5

mm2.

Weight - 0.04 kg

Type - Light value switch, 3-channel LW/S 3.1 light

sensor LF/A 1.1

7.0 LIGHTING CONTROL PLANELS

LCPs shall be located near to DBs. There shall be a dedicated Lighting Control Panel

(LCP) for every DB feeding lighting circuits in general areas. The LCP shall house the

system devices and the related control equipment depending on the no. of circuits

being controlled. This is to ensure the power wiring between the DB’s and the control

modules inside the LCPs is kept to a minimum. The LCPs shall be surface mounted IP65

polycarbonate enclosures together with built-in DIN-rails for easy installation of the

control equipment.

The wiring of the lighting circuits must be re-arranged without any variations to meet all

the specified lighting control requirements.

8.0 INPUT CONTROL DEVICES

Input modules shall comprise the following types;

Key input units (programmable switches): These shall be available in a range of styles,

colours and finishes. The key inputs shall feature led status indicators and shall be

programmable as dimmers, timers, toggle and master switches. Switches shall feature an

infrared receive option and shall be programmable as scene controllers.

No. of gangs shall be indicated on drawings. The briefing rooms, conference rooms shall

be provided with 4 scene / 2 scene dimmer modules. Touch pad shall be provided as

shown on drawings.

9.0 MOTION SENSOR, FLUSH MOUNTED

Motion device sensor with sensor angle 180 degrees is used to send switch-on

commands to actuators via the i-bus EIB. The switch-off behaviour is defined in the

actuator. Twin light sensor and after-running time are adjustable; manual operation for

ON/AUTOMATIC/OFF must be possible. Installation recessed ceiling mounted, wall

mounted or external weather proof mounting to engineers approval. Supplier must

provide all mounting accessories required.

Sensing - Passive infrared motion

detector 180° horizontal

Power supply - via EIB – Bus / C Bus

Ambient temperature

Operation - 5°C to + 45°C

Storage - 25°C to + 55°C

Coverage - Minimum 18m range

Transport - 25°C to + 70°C

Operating and display elements

1 slide switch - OFF/AUTOMATIC/ON

1 adjustment potentiometer - for Twilight sensor : 51000 lux.

1 adjustment potentiometer - for after–running time:10s to 17min.

Protection type - IP 20 according to DIN 40 050

Attached to the flush- mounted bus

couple


LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 12




Page 2 of 5

SECTION 12


INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM SURGE PROTECTION



Page 3 of 5

1.0 GENERAL

Faraday cage type lightning protection systems shall be installed to cover the complete

building as per BS EN 62305.

A 25x3mm copper tape air termination network shall be fixed at 1m intervals using DC tape

clips to the building roof. Air termination network shall be following class I LPS with 5x5m

mesh.

Items of roof-mounted plant shall be bonded to the air termination network via same

copper tapes. All exposed metalwork on the roof or the structure shall also be securely

bonded to the air termination network. A bimetal clamp shall be used to bind different

metal.

25 x 3mm copper tape down conductors shall be installed within the structural column and

clamped using ‘U’ clamps to structural rebar. Down conductors shall not be positioned

more than 10m apart around the perimeter. The connection between tape and cable

shall be by welded rod to tape clamp or prewelded if required.

The complete installation shall be inspected and certified by the authorized representative

of the manufacturer for compliance with standards.

The connection between the down conductor and the earth electrode shall be made

below ground level in a small purpose-made pit with test link and removable concrete

cover to facilitate future testing and maintenance. Each electrode shall consist of

1200x16mm or equal stainless steel rods complete with stud, spike, driving cap and a

conductor strip clamp. Sufficient number of rods of suitable length shall be installed to

provide an overall resistance to earth not exceeding 10 ohms.

All metal work on or around the building must be bonded to the lightning protection

network to avoid side flashing.

Where it is necessary to form tape to tape joints, they shall be tinned soldered and riveted.

Soldering alone will not be accepted. Clamped or bolted joints will only be accepted at

test points and for connection of down conductors to earth rods.

All materials used throughout the installation except earth rods shall be either copper or

copper based components which are corrosion resistant and compatible with the

application.

The Contractor shall submit fully detailed shop drawing for the air termination network,

down conductors, earth termination network and bonding and shall be responsible to

provide all the necessary accessories to integrate the system with the architectural finish of

the building.

2.0 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM SURGE PROTECTION

Electronic system surge protection shall be used for the, Incoming Main Power Supply :

A suitable protection should be installed in the main LV MDBs.

The ESP shall be connected in parallel with the supply. ESP should be installed within the LV

MDB by the panel assembler.



Page 4 of 5

HRC Fuses shall be provided in the connecting leads as required by the Specialist.

ESP to have neutral earth warning light, to detect if there is excessive voltage present

between neutral and earth.

Protection shall be tested in accordance with the requirement of:

BS EN 62305 : Protection against lightning.

BS2914 :1972 ‘Specification for surge diverters for alternating current power circuits’.

IEEE C62.41 – 1991 ‘Recommended practice on surge voltage in low voltage AC Power

circuits.’

The protector must not interfere with or restrict the system normal operation. It should not:

- Corrupt the normal mains power supply.

- Break or shutdown the power supply during operation.

- Have an excessive earth leakage current.

The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of no less than 10 KA (8 / 20

microsecond waveform) between any two conductors (phase to neutral, phase to earth,

neutral to earth).

The protector shall limit the transient voltage to below equipment susceptibility levels.

Unless otherwise stated, the peak transient let-through voltage shall not exceed 600 volts.

For protectors with a nominal working voltage of 230 or 240 volts, when tested in

accordance with BS 6651 : 1999 Category B – High (6kV 1.2 / 50mircorsecond open circuit

voltage, 3kA 8 / 20 microsecond short circuit current).

This peak transient let through voltage shall not exceed for all combinations of conductors:

- Phase to neutral

- Phase to earth.

- Neutral to earth.

Mains protectors (installed in shunt / parallel) should have continuous indication of its

protection status and the presence of power. Status indication should clearly show per

phase.

- Full protection present.

- Reduced protection – replacement required.

- No protection – failure of protector.

The status indication should warn of protection failure between all combinations of

conductors, including neutral to earth. (Otherwise a potentially dangerous short circuit

between neutral and earth could go undetected for some time). This should include early

warning of excessive neutral to earth voltage.



Page 5 of 5

The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must

comply with the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.

Protection for Data Communication and Telephone lines

Transient overvoltage protectors shall be installed on all data communication / signal /

telephone lines entering or leaving the building, in order to protect equipment connected

to the line, against transient overvoltages. (Where data lines travel between buildings

linking equipment in each building, transient overvoltage protectors should be installed at

both ends of the line in order to protect both pieces of equipment).

Protectors shall conform to BS EN 62305 Protection against lightning

The protector must not impair the systems normal operation. It should not:

- Restrict the system bandwidth or signal frequency.

- Introduce excessive inline resistance.

- Cause signal reflections or impendence mismatches (on high frequency systems).

The protector will have a low transient ‘let – through’ voltage for tests conducted in

accordance with BS EN 62305

This ‘let – through’ performance will be provided for all combinations of conductors :

- Signal line to signal line.

- Signal line to screen / earth.

The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of 10kA.

The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must

comply with the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturers.

The protector manufacturer should allow for the facility to mount and earth large numbers

of protectors through an accessory combined mounting and earthing kit.


EARTHING

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 13

EARTHING


EARTHING

Page 2 of 4

SECTION 13

EARTHING

INDEX

1.0 MAIN EARTHING SYSTEM

2.0 CLEAN EARTHING SYSTEM


EARTHING

Page 3 of 4

1.0 MAIN EARTHING SYSTEM

1.1 The contractor shall adequately allow in his tender for the provision and the installation

of a complete earthing system required to meet the following requirements and shall

ensure that the entire electrical installation is effectively bonded to earth as per BS 7430

and DEWA Standards.

1.2 The contractor shall ensure that the whole of the electrical installation is both

mechanically and electrically continuous throughout and is bonded to a suitable main

earth in compliance with the IEE regulations and BS Code of Practice.

1.3 A test connection link shall be provided for testing purposes.

1.4 The nominal cross-sectional area of all earth continuity conductors shall be in

accordance with the IEE regulations with the minimum size being 2.5mm2.

1.5 All switchboards shall be provided with copper earth bar continuously run along the

switchboard frames. Main earth electrodes via earthing cables shall be connected to in

accordance with DEWA, requirements.

1.6 All switchgear, metal conduit and trunking systems, metal frames, enclosures, lighting

fittings and cables sheaths shall be bonded together and connected to the earth tapes

of the appropriate switchboard. Similarly all earth pins and metallic plates of socket

outlets, switches, accessories and enclosures shall be bonded to earth with earth

continuity conductors. Each individual earth path shall be electrically continuous

throughout its length from the farthest point of the associated part of the system back to

the main earth.

1.7 All earthing cables shall be installed in accordance with the relevant requirements

called for in the cables section of this specification.

1.8 All bonding leads in the form of cable having a standard conductor shall be terminated

in "sweated" sockets and shall be rigidly bolted to earthing terminals.

1.9 All earthing cables shall be insulated with a PVC sheath. Where connection of the earth

lead to the main earth is made with a stranded cable, the earth lead shall be double

insulated with PVC.

1.10 Mechanical protection shall be provided for all external runs of earth cable as specified.

1.11 Earth cables shall have same construction details as mains cables.

1.12 The main earth pits shall be complete with all accessories. The value for earth resistance

shall be 1 ohm or less.

1.13 Equipotential bonding conductors (6mm2 minimum) shall be provided for metal pipes,

water pipes, metal doors and other extraneous conductive parts and brought to the main

earthing terminal in ground floor electrical room for final connection to the main earth pits.

1.14 The metal doors & door frames in electrical rooms and substations shall be equipotentially

bonded to the main earthing network.

1.15 The earth rods shall be stainless steel, corrosion resistant type.


EARTHING

Page 4 of 4

2.0 CLEAN EARTHING SYSTEM

2.1 Clean earthing system shall be provided for Operation Theatres, ICUs and Resuscitation

areas and shall consist 50 x 6mm riser bar connected to a separate earth pit and

connection point in each specified area. The UPS and low current panels shall also be

connected to the clean earthing system.


UPS SYSTEM

Page 1 of 19

SECTION 14

UPS SYSTEM


UPS SYSTEM

Page 2 of 19

SECTION 14

UPS SYSTEM

INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 UPS

3.0 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH


UPS SYSTEM

Page 3 of 19

1.0 GENERAL

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Un-interruptible power Supply

systems of capacities as shown on the related drawings. The system shall operate

in conjunction with the building electrical system and the generator to provide

high quality power for critical equipment loads such as computer servers and

related equipment, power outlets feeding main controllers of BMS, security system,

Fire alarm system etc. for a period of 30 minutes until the generator power is

available. This will hereafter be referred to as the “UPS”, and shall provide

continuous, regulated AC power to the loads under normal and abnormal

conditions, including loss of the utility AC power. The UPS shall be completely

solid-state except for maintenance bypass switches which may be mechanical.

All UPS shall have interface cards to have the following and shall be complete

with system software:

1) Required input and output dry contacts for reporting alarm and status.

2) RS232 port for serial communication for advanced remote monitoring

and control through computer network.

3) Communication port with appropriate protocol for connection to BMS

system.

All UPS systems shall be based on latest IGBT (insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor)

technology with PWM (Pulse Width Modulation).

Rectifier configuration shall be such that THDI (Total Harmonic Distortion Current)

at upstream shall be minimum.

The following shall be furnished along with the equipment:

Factory testing.

Documentation.

The UPS shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

The equipment proposed must be in conformity with the following directives and

standards – Directives

- 9/336/EEC (and amendments 91/263 and 92/31), 3/23/EEC, 3/68/EEC.

Standards

- Safety

N 50091-1-1 EN 60127, EN 60269-1

N 50091-1-2 EN 60445, EN 60529, EN 60950, EN 61008-1, EN 61009-1

- EMC

N 50091-2 EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2, EN 55011, EN 55022


UPS SYSTEM

Page 4 of 19

EC 62040-2 EN 61000-2-2, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3,

EN 61000-4-1, EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-4,

EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-11, CISPR 16-1.

- Battery EC 896-2, Eurobat.

- Marking CE, TUV/GS

- Design Production Logistics & Service ISO 9001

- Applicable local laws and regulations

The UPS system shall be capable of withstanding any combination of the

following environment conditions in which it must operate, without mechanical or

electrical damage or degradation of operating characteristics:

a) Ambient temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C

b) Relative Humidity: Up to 95% (non-condensing)

c) Interference: The UPS equipment shall be provided with EMI/RFI

suppression following EN-50091-2.

Audible Noise: Noise generated by the UPS system under any condition of

normal operation shall not exceed an allowable sound pressure level of 55-70

dB(A) measured at 1 metre depending on the rating of the UPS.

2.0 UPS

Objectives: To supply, install, test and commission the Uninterruptible Power

Supply system as per the technical specifications laid down in this document.

Ratings : As per schematic

Quantity : As per schematic

Power factor : 0.9 (output) or higher KVA UPS if PF is 0.8.

The Uninterruptible Power Supply system specified herein should comply to each

of the following mandatory points keeping in view the very latest in UPS

technology to provide the best possible Power protection and most importantly

offer Maximum Energy Saving:

- UPS should be based on latest technology for Modulation for higher

accuracy and the best overall efficiency of 92% minimum.

- True On Line Double Conversion and Voltage Frequency Independent

(VFI).

- PS. Input Total Harmonic Distortion of Current THDI <5% using Active Filter

(DCU).

- Superior Battery Management for measurement of True Backup Time.


UPS SYSTEM

Page 5 of 19

- Back Feed Protection Devices on the Static Bypass and Inverter to

prevent Power feed back to the upstream devices.

- Digital Signal Processing for optimised inverter switching and fast and

precise control.

- IEM MODE (Intelligent Energy Management) for Parallel Redundant

Systems. Refer Section 10.0.

- Redundant Parallel Architecture and Paralleling Capability of up to 8 UPS

systems.

- The UPS manufacturer must be an ISO 9001 / EN 29001 certified

organisation with minimum 30 years experience in the design,

manufacture, servicing and testing of UPS Systems.

- TUV/CE Certification.

TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION

Active Filter (DCU) for 5th, 7th, 11th and 13th harmonics to reduce reflected

current harmonics THDI to a value of less than 7% and to improve input

power factor to 0.98 at full load. The filter must never present a capacitive

load to the mains. The DCU should operate on all UPS systems from 40kVA

till 500kVA.

This arrangement consists of a 6-pulse rectifier with the Active Filter (DCU)

connected at the input of the UPS in parallel. The Active Filter (DCU) will

be mounted in an additional matching cabinet.

Each UPS system shall consist of the following major components:

• One rectifier/charger

• One static inverter

• One no-break static transfer switch

• One maintenance by-pass switch

• One battery bank

• One main control and alarm panel complete with mimic diagram and

LCD display

OPERATION

The UPS system shall operate in any of the following modes:

- On-line Mode - During normal operation, the UPS system shall be used to

provide precise regulated and transient-free power to the computer

equipment loads. The mains supply provides power to the rectifier / charger.


UPS SYSTEM

Page 6 of 19

The rectifier / charger shall provide regulated DC power to support the

inverter and simultaneously maintain the battery in a fully charged condition.

The inverter shall convert the DC power into regulated AC power for the

load.

- Battery Mode - Upon failure of the mains supply, input power for the inverter

shall automatically be supplied from the directly connected battery. When

the mains is restored or the standby generator set supply is ready, input

power for the inverter and for recharging the battery shall automatically be

supplied from the rectifier/charger.

If the input does not return, the UPS shall automatically shut itself down in an

orderly manner when the discharge limit of the battery is reached.

- By-pass Mode - Upon the failure of static inverter, the no-break static transfer

switch shall be activated automatically to isolate the faulty inverter and at

the same time maintain a continuous supply to the system load. The

automatic transfer mode shall also operate in the event of system

overloading or if irregular or undesirable output for the load is detected. In

this case, the system shall automatically return to the original mode of

operation if the disturbance is cleared.

- Manual By-pass Mode - If the UPS system needs to be isolated for testing or

removed from service for maintenance, the maintenance by-pass shall

transfer the loads from inverter to the mains without interruption and vice

versa.

- Power Conditioner Mode - If the battery only must be taken out of service for

maintenance, it will be disconnected from the rectifier/charger and inverter

by means of a circuit breaker. The UPS shall continue to function and meet all

the performance criteria specified herein except for the protection time

requirement.

- Intelligent Energy Management (IEM) mode - In order to increase efficiency a

single UPS shall operate in IEM mode supplying the load through the static by-

pass line within specified tolerances (customisable). This transfer shall be

manual, automatic (load dependent) and programmable. In case of by-

pass out of set tolerance, the UPS shall transfer the load interruption free to

inverter line.

RECTIFIER

- General - The rectifier/charger must consist of a 12-pulse fully controller

Thyristor bridge, which converts the 3-phase utility voltage into a controlled

and regulated DC voltage, in order to supply power to the inverter, and to

simultaneously charge the battery.


UPS SYSTEM

Page 7 of 19

- Capacity - The rectifier/charger shall have sufficient capacity to support a

fully loaded inverter and at the same time maintain the battery in a fully

charged condition. If the battery is fully discharged, the rectifier/charger

shall recharge the battery to 95% of its fully charged condition within twelve

(12) hours and at the same time supplying full load current to the system.

- Walk-in - The rectifier/charger must contain a timed walk-in circuit to limit the

inrush current. The allowable initial inrush surge and the walk-in time should

be adjustable and not exceed 30 sec.

- Sequential power walk-in - a sequential walk-in of every single

rectifier/charger shall be automatically executed in case of the start up of a

parallel system in order to limit the inrush current to the value of one single

system.

- Current and Voltage Limit - The rectifier/charger output current and voltage

shall be limited to the battery supplier's recommendation.

Rectifier charger Technical Characteristics

Input Power

- Voltage = 400/230V

- Voltage tolerance =(+15%)

- Frequency = 50 Hz + 10%

- Power Factor > 0.8 lagging

BATTERY

- The battery banks must be stationary and of the following type: Absorbed

Glass Mat type, Sealed Lead Acid totally maintenance free with a minimum

design life of12 years at 25°C.

- The batteries shall fully comply with BS 6290 part – 4, IEC 896-2 and DIN 43534.

The proposed batteries shall have the following features:

• Low self discharge

• Multiposition usage

• Spill proof and leak proof

• Completely maintenance free, sealed construction.

• Increased durability and deep cycle ability for heavy demand

application.

• Value regulated Max internal pressure 2.5 psi.

• FAA and IATA approved as non-hazardous.


UPS SYSTEM

Page 8 of 19

- End Cell Voltage should be limited to a maximum of 1.65VDC and not any

value below this to safeguard the life of the battery. The Charge voltage

should be set for 2.27-2.30VPC at 25°C cycling.

- The 99% of the gas generated during normal operation shall be internally

recombined. The pole caps shall be Neoprene to prevent accidents. All

battery interconnectors must be solid or laminated tinned copper bars.

- The ampere-hour rating of the battery shall be sufficient to support the

inverter for the protection time of 15 minutes with the inverter operating at full

rated load at power factor 1.0 for 10-40kVA and 0.9 for 60 kVA - 500kVA.

- Specified Battery Manufacturers:

Exide-Sprinter Germany

Celltec USA

Dynasty USA

Yuasa Japan

BATTERY CABINETS:

- Bolted Construction, with double door, central supporting column,

removable side and top cover and open bottom. The cabinet must have a

piped frame with four removable battery shelves and screw on panels at top,

side and rear. Battery fused isolator must be located inside the cabinet with

auxiliary contact to indicate isolator close or open. The battery shall be

mounted in a cabinet matching the UPS Colour and supplied by the same

UPS Manufacturer.

- The UPS system must be provided with a manual and automatic battery test

(pre-selectable by day of the week, time of day, date of the month). The test

operates by slowly initiating a linear decrease of the rectifier output voltage.

If a battery fault is detected, the rectifier voltage will return to nominal

avoiding transferring the critical load on by-pass. Automatic battery test by

simply shutting down the rectifier is not permitted.

INVERTER

- General - Power transistors of the IGBT type must accomplish the conversion

of DC to AC. The technology should strictly be based on Latest IGBT

MODULATION Techniques.

- Failure of any components or power stage shall not interrupt the AC output

instead it shall disconnect itself from the configuration while transferring the

load to the static transfer switch and then activate an alarm.

- IGBT MODULATION TECHNOLOGY

The Modulation of the IGBT’s shall be of latest technology and shall

incorporate Maximum modulation at 415 V AC Output. The Output

Transformer shall be designed for 415VAC. The Number of battery cells in the


UPS SYSTEM

Page 9 of 19

DC link shall therefore remain constant for all ranges of Output Voltages as

mentioned below –

Output Voltage No. of Battery cells No. of Batteries

400V 192 32*

415V 192 32*

*Note: Exact no of batteries shall be as per manufactrurers standard.

- Superior Battery Management (SBM) - This feature should be built into the UPS

as standard and should facilitate the following –

• Measurement of true backup time.

• Temperature Voltage compensation.

• Programmable battery tests.

• Increase in battery life.

- The waveform shall be fed through a filter circuit and protected by fast fuses.

The inverter shall be able to handle short-circuit conditions without any

damage.

- Frequency Control - The output frequency of the inverter shall be controlled

by an oscillator, which can be operated as a free running unit or in

synchronised operation with a separate AC source or the future redundant

inverter.

If the external synchronising source deviates from the pre-set frequency by +

1% or 4% (selectable), the oscillator shall automatically revert to free running,

and the microprocessor controlled accuracy shall be + 0.01%.

- Capacitor Discharge - Output filter capacitors shall be provided with a quick

discharging circuit, which shall automatically discharge the capacitors to

safe value within a short time after the shutting down of the inverter.

- Inverter Technical details:

a. Output Power - Voltage = 400/230V, 3 phase, 4 wire

- Frequency = 50 Hz + 0,1%

- Adjustment = + 4% w/mains synch.

b. Total Harmonics - Linear Load = < 2%

- Non-linear Load = < 3% (to EN-50091)

c. Phase Displacement -100% balanced load = 120° +/-1%

-100% UNBALANCED LOAD = 120° +/-2%

d. Unbalanced Voltage - For balanced load = +/- 1%

- For unbalanced load = +/- 3%

e. Voltage Transients - 50% load step = +/- 2%

- 100% load step = +/- 3%


UPS SYSTEM

Page 10 of 19

- STATIC 100% LOAD = +/- 1%

- By mains recovery = +/- 1%

f. Recovery Time = 20 m sec. to + 1%

g. Inverter Overload Capability = 125% for 10 min.

= 150% for 1 min.

(30 sec for 400-500kVA)

h. Crest Factor > 3:1 (according to EN-

50091)

i. Fuse Clearance capability = 20% In within 5-10ms.

STATIC BYPASS

- The electronic by-pass shall consist of a static SCR / Thyristor-switch, used to

provide an uninterruptible transfer of the load to the utility in case of

remarkable variation of the output voltage. The electronic by-pass shall be

equipped with two contactors in series, which provide to supply the load

from utility or inverter.

- The electronic by-pass switch must have continuous 150% overload rating

capacity. In addition the static transfer switch shall support 200% overload for

5 minutes and 1000% overload for 10 milliseconds (non repetitive).

- Back feed protection - The electronic by-pass switch shall consist of a pair of

microprocessor controlled Thyristors and a contactor in series avoiding a

back feed energy into the mains (back feed).

- The electronic by-pass switch shall be able to be activated manually by a

switch/push button to affect the transfer. The switching time from inverter to

reserve and vice-versa shall be of No-Break when synchronised.

- Automatic retransfer delay time back to inverter from by-pass after a transfer

from inverter to by-pass shall be 10 seconds.

- The number of automatic transfer/re-transfer from by-pass to inverter when

the status of the inverter logic signals an alarm conditions, shall be selectable.

MAINTENANCE BYPASS

- On each UPS the maintenance by-pass shall be based on a pair of manually

operated circuit breakers which allow the electrical isolation of the UPS from

the load, while still supplying the load with power directly from the utility.

REDUNDANT PARALLEL ARCHITECTURE- RPA

- Where two or upto eight systems are to operate in parallel the system will

operate in Redundant Parallel Architecture or RPA. The following principles

are to be met in totality in order to achieve the highest levels of reliability.


UPS SYSTEM

Page 11 of 19

- Two or more UPS systems to be linked in Peer to Peer configuration

concurrently supplying the load.

Decentralized by-pass concept.

Decentralized control electronics.

Redundant (n+1) operation and control for critical functions such as

“Synchronization” and “Bypass operation”.

Redundant communication link between individual units.

Redundant MICROPROCESSORS for no Common point of Failure.

Intelligent Energy Management (IEM) for power saving. Refer Section 12.4.

- In the event that the system is to operate as separate standalone units then

disconnection of the RPA system should be possible without any changes in

the existing architecture of the system.

INTELLIGENT ENERGY MANAGEMENT (IEM)

- The IEM software package should be an integral part of the RPA system

which allows the RPA system to save energy during low load conditions. This is

achieved by requesting / programming the UPS or its Inverter to transfer its

load to the remaining UPS systems and go into a silent mode. This enables the

entire heat dissipation of this system to be nullified. This Silent system however

is On line electronically and will switch on as programmed in the event of a

problem with the utility or any other system. All this done without disruption to

the load.

- The IEM feature should ensure the following functions –

• Individual Inverters, which are not required to sustain the load can

automatically be switched off to save energy.

• Depending on Load level, inverters are switched off Cyclically, so that

every UPS has the same amount of operating hours over a period of

time.

• During an inverter switch off due to low load the remaining selected

inverters should sustain the load.

• Customer to define if the rectifiers to remain ON for battery charging or

to be switched off for the UPS systems whose Inverters have been

selected to switch off.

• Customer to define after how long or at what Battery level rectifier

should switch ON.

• The IEM mode to be freely programmed to suit customer defined

degree of redundancy.

• The reaction of the system in case of problems can also be selected

(for example: How the switched Off inverter or UPS should react to a

Utility failure).


UPS SYSTEM

Page 12 of 19

OPERATING PANEL AND DISPLAY

- A backlit 4 x 20 alphanumeric character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) or similar

display, controlled by push buttons/membrane keys shall be provided.

- The UPS system main control panel with LCD back-lit display shall include the

following measurements indications:

• Rectifier: input voltage (Ph-Ph), input frequency, number of rectifier

mains failure

• Battery: voltage, temperature, charge/discharge current in Amperes,

remaining Autonomy time

• Inverter: output voltage, output frequency, inverter temperature,

operating hours

• By-pass: input voltage (Ph-N), input frequency, number of by-pass

mains failure

• Load: load level in % (each phase), load current/phase in A, Load

power in KVA/kW

• UPS: serial number, software version, number of overload condition,

operating hours

- The UPS system main control panel with LCD back-lit display shall include the

following events indications with date and time:

• Rectifier: mains rectifier OK, rectifier ON/OFF.

• Battery: start battery test, end battery test, no conditions for battery

test.

• Inverter: inverter cannot be switched ON/OFF, inverter ON/OFF.

• By-pass: mains by-pass OK, by-pass power insufficient, by-pass locked,

by-pass free.

- Load: load-OFF, multiple load transfer, load on by-pass/inverter, no

more overload Condition.

General: maintenance by-pass ON/OFF, inverter and mains

synchronised/not Synchronised, input circuit breakers open/closed.

- On the system alarm panel, a common audible alarm and the respective

indicating LED’s shall be initiated when any of the following conditions are

present:

• Rectifier: mains out of tolerance; control logic failure,


UPS SYSTEM

Page 13 of 19

• Battery:low voltage; high voltage; earth fault; contactor closing or

opening failure; insufficient power.

• Inverter: fuse failure; contactor closing or opening failure; voltage out

of

• tolerance; output power insufficient; overload.

• By-pass: mains out of tolerance; contactor closing or opening failure.

• Load: overload; load locked on inverter; load locked on by-pass.

• General: load off for overload; battery low and over-temperature

conditions; inverter and mains not synchronised; UPS overload.

- The UPS, through the LCD, must be able to store up to 256 alarms or events

with date and time.

- Mimic Panel - A mimic panel shall incorporating LED indicators depicting the

complete single line diagram of the UPS system shall be silk-screened to

display the following:

• A synoptic diagram of the UPS representing actual operational status

with integrated LED’s and power flow indications.

• Emergency load shutdown (LOAD OFF) push button with protective

cover.

• Signal SERVICE CHECK (LED) to indicate that maintenance is required.

• COMMON ALARM, visual signal (LED) and acoustic signal (internal

buzzer).

• Signal STOP OPERATION (LED), visual and acoustic warning

approximately 3 minutes (programmable) before complete automatic

load disconnection (for example when the battery is at minimum

voltage or inverter is over-temperature).

• LED indication for the remaining back-up time and load level.

• Command button keys for INVERTER ON and INVERTER OFF.

• Command button key for LED functionality test.

• Command button key (MUTE) to reset general alarms and buzzer

COMMUNICATION

- The UPS shall be equipped with a customer interface card, which will provide:

- 6 output dry contact available on terminal blocks (no/nc) and Delta

connector

these contacts shall be programmable out of 24 different alarms or events

directly from the keyboard mounted on the front panel of the UPS


UPS SYSTEM

Page 14 of 19

- Input Connections for customer provided signals must be available for

”generator on” (reduces battery charging current during mains failures) and

”emergency power off” to shutdown UPS and load in the event of an

emergency).

RS232 port for the following purposes:

• Serial communication for advanced remote monitoring

communication via PC.

• Serial printer connection.

• Modem connection.

- Intelligent Energy Management - Energy management software shall be

provided for programming of system operational parameters. The software

shall allow the user to program the operating hours of each UPS in the system

during low load conditions so that each UPS is operating at its optimum

efficiency. i.e. if four (4) UPS are in parallel redundancy mode and the total

load is less than 50% of the UPS capacity, the software will shut down two (2)

units (inverter) during off-peak hours in order to save energy and thereby the

overall operating cost). If during off-peak condition, one UPS fails, the

software shall be able to switch ON one of the two non-operating UPS in

order to achieve the redundancy requested, this in max. 30 seconds time.

However, the functional requirement of the system must be maintained

during this period (i.e. redundancy is maintained)

- MODBUS RTU. In the event that Building Management System exists the

communication of the UPS to the BMS should be via MODBUS.

MECHANICAL DESIGN

- Colour - The UPS cabinet colour shall be RAL standard.

- Ventilation - Forced air-cooling shall be provided to ensure that all

components are operated within specifications with air entry in the base and

exit in the top. The air volume and fan speed must be microprocessor

controlled in relation to the load and the inverter’s heat sink temperature.

- Cable Entry - Input to the system and outgoing cables shall be from the

top/bottom front or top/bottom rear of the cabinet.

- Modular Construction - The UPS system shall be modular in construction for

ease of maintenance and to minimise downtime.

- Power Connections - Adequate space for termination shall be provided for

incoming and outgoing cables. The cables for interconnecting the UPS and

battery cubicles shall be supplied for side-by-side installation.

- Personal Safety - High voltage, low voltage and DC section of the system shall

be adequately separated to ensure safety during maintenance and

testing. The equipment shall meet the requirements of protection index IP 20.


UPS SYSTEM

Page 15 of 19

3.0 AUTO TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS)

The automatic transfer switch shall be provided with fully rated overlapping

neutral transfer contacts. The neutrals of the normal and emergency power

sources shall be connected together only during the transfer and retransfer

operation and remain connected together until power source contacts close on

the source to which transfer or retransfer is being made The overlapping neutral

transfer contacts shall not overlap for a time duration greater than 100

milliseconds. A non-over-lapping neutral transfer (fourth) pole shall not be

acceptable.

TRANSFER SWITCH

- The transfer switch unit shall be electrically operated and mechanically held.

The electrical operator shall be a single solenoid mechanism, momentarily

energized to minimize power consumption and heat generation. The

operating transfer time shall be one-sixth (1/6) of a second or less.

- The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by voltage variations or

momentary outages so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant

value and temperature rise at the contacts is minimized for maximum

reliability and operating life. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to

ensure only one of two possible positions-normal or emergency.

- All main contact shall be silver composition. Switches shall have segmented,

blow-on construction for high withstand current capability and be protected

by separate arcing contacts.

- Inspection of all contacts (movable and stationary), linkages and moving

parts shall be possible from the front of the switch without dis-assembly of

operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. A

manual operating handle shall be provided for maintenance purposes. The

handle shall permit the operator to manually stop the contacts at any point

throughout the entire travel to properly inspect and service the contacts

when required.

BYPASS-ISOLATION SWITCH (BPS)

- A two-way bypass-isolation switch shall provide manual bypass of the load to

either source and permit isolation of the automatic transfer switch from all

source and load power conductors. All main contacts shall be manually

driven.

- Power interconnections shall be silver plated copper bus bar. The only field

installed power connections shall be at the service and load terminals of the

bypass-isolation switch. All control interwiring shall be provided with

disconnect plugs.

- Separate bypass and isolation handles shall be utilized to provide clear

distinction between the two functions. The bypass handle shall provide three

operating modes: By-pass to normal, Automatic and bypass to emergency.

Bypass to the load carrying source shall be affected without any interruption

of power to the load (make-before-break contacts). The operating speed of


UPS SYSTEM

Page 16 of 19

the bypass contacts shall be the same as that of the associated automatic

transfer switch and shall be independent of the speed at which the manual

bypass handle is operated. In the automatic mode, bypass contacts shall be

all open so they will not be subjected to fault currents.

- The isolation handle shall provide three operating modes: Closed, Test and

Open. The test mode shall permit testing of the entire emergency power

system, including the automatic transfer switch(es), without any interruption

of power to the load. The open mode shall completely isolate the automatic

transfer switch from all source and load power conductors. When in the

Open mode, it shall be possible to completely withdraw the automatic

transfer switch for inspection or maintenance to conform to code

requirements without removal of power conductors or the use of any tools.

- When the isolation switch is in the TEST or OPEN mode, the bypass switch shall

function as a manual transfer switch allowing transfer and retransfer of the

load between the two available sources without the feedback of load-

regenerated voltage to the transfer switch. This transfer/retransfer operation

shall comply with Paragraph 42 of UL 1008.

MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL MODULE

- The control module shall direct the operation of the transfer switch. The

module's sensing and logic shall be controlled by a built-in microprocessor for

maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and inherent digital

communications capability. The control module shall be connected to the

transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall include

a keyed disconnect plug to enable the control module to be disconnected

from the transfer switch for route maintenance.

- The control module shall be completely enclosed with a protective cover

and be mounted separately from the transfer switch unit for safety and ease

of maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be provided on plug-in

printed circuit bards for maximum reliability. Interfacing relays shall be

industrial control grade plug-in type with dust covers. All relays shall be

identical to minimize the number of unique parts.

- The control panel shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand

capability in accordance with IEE standard 4672-1974 (ANSI C37.90a-1974)

and the impulse withstand voltage test in accordance with the proposed

NEMA standard ICS 1-109.

OPERATION

Three phase control shall be provided for three phase power sources. Three

phase controls shall include a selector switch to enable temporary operation on

single phase power sources.

The voltage of each phase of the normal source shall be monitored, with pickup

adjustable from 85 to 100% and dropout adjustable from 75 to 98% of pickup

setting, both in increments of 1%, and shall be fully field adjustable without the

use of any tools, meters or power supplies. Repetitive accuracy of settings shall

be ± 2% or better over an operating temperature range of -20oC to 70oC. Factory


UPS SYSTEM

Page 17 of 19

set to pick up at 90% and drop out at 85%.

The control module shall include four time delays that are fully field-adjustable in

increments of at least 13 steps over the entire range as follows:

• Time delay to override momentary normal source outages to delay all

transfer switch and engine starting signals. Adjustable from 0 to 6

seconds. Factory set a 1 second, unless indicated otherwise on the

plans.

• Transfer to emergency time delay. Adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes.

Factory set at 0 minutes unless indicated otherwise on the plans.

• Retransfer to normal time delay. Time delay is automatically bypassed

if emergency source fails and normal source is acceptable. Adjustable

from 0 to 30 minutes. factory set at 30 minutes unless otherwise

indicated on the plans. Provide a toggle switch to manually bypass

time delay on retransfer.

• Unloaded running time delay for emergency engine generator

cooldown. Adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Factory set at 5 minutes,

unless indicated otherwise on the plans.

- A set of DPDT gold-flashed contacts rated 10 amps. 32VDC shall be provided

for a low-voltage engine start signal when the normal source fails. The start

signal shall prevent dry cranking of the generator by requiring the generator

to reach proper output, and to run for the duration of the cooldown setting

regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is

transferred. Also provide a commit/no commit to transfer selector switch to

select whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if

the normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load.

- A momentary-type test switch shall be provided to simulate a normal source

failure. Also, terminals for a remote contact which opens to signal the ATS to

transfer to emergency and terminals for remote contacts which open to

inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal shall be provided.

- A visual position indicator shall be provided to indicate bypass-isolation

switch position. Pilot lights shall indicate availability of power sources and

automatic transfer switch position. A prominent and detailed instruction plate

shall be furnished.

- One set of auxiliary contact shall be provided rated 10 amps, 480V AC,

consisting of one contact closed when the ATS is connected to normal and

one contact closed when the ATS is connected to emergency. Output

terminals to signal the actual availability of the normal and emergency

sources as determined by the voltage sensing pickup and dropout settings

for each source, shall be provided.


UPS SYSTEM

Page 18 of 19

- Each switch shall be furnished with an operator's manual providing installation

and operating instructions.

COMPLIANCE WITH CODES AND STANDARDS

- The ATS / BPS shall conform to the current requirements of:

• UL 1008: Standard for automatic transfer switches

• NFPA 70: National electrical code, including use in emergency and

standby systems in accordance with Articles 517,700, 701 and 702

• NFPA 99: Essential electrical systems for health care facilities.

• NFPA 110: Standard for emergency and standby power

systems.

• IEEE Standard 446: IEEE Recommended practice for emergency and

standby power systems (Orange Book)

• IEEE Standard 241:IEEE Recommended practice for electric power

systems in commercial buildings (Gray Book)

• NEMA Standard ICS-2-447: AC Automatic Transfer Switches

• IEC: Standard for automatic transfer switches

- The ATS shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 as follows:

• Rated in amperes for total system transfer including control of motors,

electric discharge lamps, eclectic heating and tungsten filament lamp

loads as referred to in paragraph 38.13 of UL 1008.

• Switches 400 amperes and below shall be suitable for 100 tungsten-

filament lamp load. Switches rated above 400 amperes shall be

suitable for 30% tungsten-filament load.

• Temperature rise tests after the overload and endurance tests to

confirm the ability of the transfer switches to carry their rated current

within the allowable temperature limits.

• No welding of contacts. Transfer switch must be electrically operable

to alternate source after the withstand current tests.

• Dielectric tests at 1960 volts, rms, minimum after the withstand current

test.

- In addition to the above, ATS / BPS for use with fire pumps shall conform to

the requirements of NFPA 20, standard for Centrifugal fire pumps.

WITHSTAND CURRENT RATINGS.


UPS SYSTEM

Page 19 of 19

- The ATS/BPS shall be rated to withstand the available rms symmetrical short-

circuit current at the ATS/BPS terminals with the type of overcurrent protection

shown on the plans.

TESTS AND CERTIFICATION

- All production units shall be subjected to the following factory tests:

• The complete ATS / BPS shall be tested to ensure proper operation of

the individual components and correct overall sequence of operation

and to ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency and

time delay settings are in compliance with the specification

requirements.

• The switch shall be subjected to a dielectric strength test per NEMA

Standard ICS 1-109.21.

- Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying

compliance with all of the requirements of this specification including

compliance with the above codes and standards, and withstand current

ratings. The certification shall identify, by serial number(s), the equipment

involved. No exceptions to the specifications, other than those stipulated at

the time of submittal, shall be included in the certification.

CONFIGURATION AND MANUFACTURER

- The ATS / BPS system shall be supplied completely assembled in a form

enclosure BSEN 60439.

- The ATS / BPS manufacturer shall maintain a local service centre capable of

emergency services or routine preventive maintenance and shall offer

preventative maintenance contracts. The manufacturer shall maintain

records of each switch, by serial number, for a minimum of 20 years.


ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 1 of 25

Section 15

ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 2 of 25

Section 15

ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Index

1.0 SYSTEM DISCRIPTION

2.0 VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM

3.0 GRAPHIC COMMAND CENTER

4.0 INSTALLATION

5.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 3 of 25

1.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Furnish and install a complete analogue addressable Fire Alarm system as

described herein and as shown on the plans to be wired, connected, and left in

first class operating condition.

a) The system consist of stand alone analogue addressable fire alarm

control panel with integrated voice alarm system in the building and a

main fire alarm command center with mimic panel located in the control

room.

b) Any alarm or trouble from the peripheral circuits shall sound the buzzer,

glow the alarm /Trouble/LED provided for each sensor and the 80

character LCD shall display in plain language the nature of event in the

local stand alone panel and at the command centre, the same shall be

repeated at the repeater panel installed.

c) The sounder circuits shall be programmed in the control panel to have

primary or secondary (or) sequential bell ringing. With time delays if

necessary as instructed by the consultant during commissioning.

d) In case of an alarm, the bell shall ring as indicated above. The AHUs in

the related fire zone shall be switched off and a pre-recorded alarm

message shall be enunciated through the public address system.

e) The (AHU’s) Air handling units shall be interlocked with the fire alarm

control panel for tripping purpose during fire condition.

f) The auxiliary circuits in the control panel shall be programmed to activate

corresponding to the nature of event. All equipment to be installed as

shown in the layout drawings.

g) The system shall be interlocked with the integral voice alarm system to

initiate a pre-recorded message announcement.

h) The system shall be interlocked with the security access control system to

release the door locks in case of fire, however exact sequence of

operation/control shall be to consultant approval.

i) The system shall also interfaced with elevator control system; sequence

of elevator recall in case of alarm activation shall be programmed in

accordance with consultant requirements and to their approval.

j) The system shall be Analogue addressable concept with closed loop

initiating device circuits, individual zone supervision, individual indicating

appliance circuit supervision, incoming and standby power supervision.

Include control panel, manual pull stations, automatic fire detectors,

sounders, annunciator, remote control devices, all wiring, connections to

devices, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary material for

a complete operating system.

Audible alarm Notification:



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 4 of 25

Activation of any system fire, supervisory, trouble or status initiating device

shall cause the following actions and indications in the control panels:

a. Sound a pre announce alarm tone for a maximum of five

seconds followed by a field programmable digitized custom

evacuation voice message, on the floor of alarm, the floor below

and the floor above. At the end of the voice message, the alarm

tone shall resume. This sequence shall sound continuously until the

alarm silence switch at the control panel is activated

b. A simultaneous message shall be delivered via all alarm speakers

installed on the remaining floors indicating the requirement for

occupants of these floors to remain alert for further instructions.

c. An automatic announcement or tone evacuation signal shall be

capable of interruption by the operation of the system

microphone to give voice evacuation instructions overriding the

pre programmed sequences.

d. Status lights next to speaker selection switches on the control

panel shall indicate speaker circuit selection.

FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

Where shown on the plans, and as recommended by system manufacturer,

provide and install a Fire Alarm Control Panel. Construction shall be modular with

solid state, microprocessor based electronics with plug-in modules. It shall display

only that primary controls and displays essential to operation during a fire alarm

condition.

Although the keypad can be used for control of the entire system, it shall only be

used for maintenance purposes. Keypads shall not be visible or required to

operate the system during fire alarm conditions.

A local audible device shall sound during Alarm, Trouble or supervisory

conditions. This audible device shall sound differently during each condition to

distinguish one condition from another without having to view the panel. This

audible device shall also sound differently during each keypress to provide an

audible feedback (chirp) to ensure that the key has been pressed properly.

The fire alarm control panel shall allow for loading or editing special instructions

and operating sequences as required. The system is to be capable of on site

programming to accommodate and facilitate expansion, building parameter

changes or changes as required by local codes. All software operations are to

be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control

panel. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions

stored in memory.

The ability for selective input/output control functions based on ANDing, ORing,

NOTing, timing and special coded operations is to also be incorporated in the

resident software programming of the system.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 5 of 25

The system Initiating & Notification circuit to be provided with minimum of 20%

spare for connecting any future device as necessary.

CONTROL PANEL & OPERATION

Under normal condition the front panel shall display a "SYSTEM NORMAL"

message and the current time and date.

Should an abnormal condition be detected the appropriate LED (Alarm,

Supervisory, or Trouble) shall flash. The panel audible signal shall pulse for alarm

conditions and sound steadily for trouble and supervisory conditions.

The panel shall display the following information relative to the abnormal

condition of a point in the system:

a) Custom location label

b) Type of device (i.e.; smoke, pull station, water flow).

c) Point status (i.e.; alarm, trouble).

These three characteristics relative to an abnormal condition of a point shall be

displayed simultaneously. A LED for alarm and one for trouble shall be provided

for each room for zone identification as backup to the LCD Displayed. LCD only

Displays shall not be acceptable.

Pressing the appropriate acknowledge button shall acknowledge the alarm or

trouble condition.

After all the points have been acknowledged, the LED's shall glow steady and

the panel audible signal will be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory,

and trouble conditions shall be displayed along with a prompt to review each list

chronologically. The end of the list shall be indicated.

Alarm Silencing: Should the “Alarm Silence” button be pressed all alarm signals

shall cease operation.

The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state

after an alarm condition has been remedied. The display shall stop the user

through the reset process with simple English language messages. Messages shall

provide operator assurance of the sequential steps (like, "IN PROGRESS", "RESET

COMPLETED", and "SYSTEM NORMAL:) as they occur, should all alarm conditions

be cleared.

Should an alarm condition continue to exist, the system shall remain in an

abnormal state. System control relays shall not reset. The panel audible signal

and the Alarm LED shall be on. The display shall indicate the total number of

alarms and troubles present in the system along with a prompting to review the

points. These points will not require acknowledgement if they were previously

acknowledged.

FUNCTION KEYS



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 6 of 25

Additional function keys shall be provided to access status data for all system

points. As a minimum the status data shall include Disable/Enable Status,

Verification Tallies of Initiating Devices, Acknowledge Status, etc.

HISTORY LOGGING

In addition to any required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability

to store a minimum of three hundred (300) events in an alarm log plus a minimum

of three hundred (300) events in a separate trouble log.

WALK TEST WITH HISTORY LOGGING

The system shall be capable of being tested by one person. While in testing

mode, the alarm activation of an initiating device circuit shall be silently logged

as an alarm condition in the historical data file. The panel shall automatically

reset itself after logging of the alarm.

The momentary disconnection of an initiating or indicating device circuit shall be

silently logged as a trouble condition in the historical data file. The panel shall

automatically reset itself after logging of the trouble condition.

The walk test sequence shall have the capability of activating the alarm

indicating appliances to signal a unique code associated to the alarm zone.

The control panel shall be capable of supporting multiple numbers of testing

groups whereby one group of points may be in a testing mode and the other

groups may be active and operate as programmed per normal system

operation. After testing is considered complete, testing data may be retrieved

from the system in chronological order to ensure device/circuit activation.

Should an alarm condition occur from an active point, not in walk test mode, it

shall perform all standard programmed alarmed sequences.

LED SUPERVISION

All slave module LED's shall be supervised for burnout or disarrangement. Should

a problem occur, the panel shall display the module and the LED location

numbers to facilitate location of that LED.

SYSTEM TROUBLE REMINDER

Should a trouble condition be present within the system and the audible trouble

signal silenced, the trouble signal shall resound at preprogrammed time intervals

to act as a reminder that the fire alarm system is not 100% operational. Both the

time interval and the trouble reminder signal shall be programmable to suit the

user’s application.

ACCESS LEVELS

There shall be a minimum of four (4) access levels. Authorized personnel shall

only make changes to passcodes. Systems not capable of password protected

manual command operations shall provide key operated switches for these



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 7 of 25

functions. Function key switches shall be keyed differently from any other keyed

switches or locks used within the system.

In order to maintain security when entering a passcode, the digits entered will

not be displayed. All key presses will be acknowledged by local audible

momentary tones.

When a correct passcode is entered, an "ACCESS GRANTED" message shall be

displayed. The new access level shall be in effect until the operator leaves the

keypad inactive for ten (10) minutes or manually logs out.

Should an invalid code be entered, the operator shall be notified with a message

and shall be allowed up to three chances to enter a valid code. After three

unsuccessful tries, an "ACCESS DENIED" message shall be displayed.

Access to a level will only allow the operator to perform all actions within that

level and all actions of lower levels, not higher levels.

The following keys/switches shall have access levels associated with them:

a) Alarm Silence

b) System Reset

c) Set Time/Date

d) Manual Control

e) On/Off/Auto Control

f) Disable/Enable

g) Clear Historical Alarm Log

h) Clear Historical Trouble Log

i) Walk Test

j) Change alarm Verification.

Acknowledge keys shall also require privileged access to acknowledge points. If

the operator presses an acknowledge key with insufficient access, an error

message will be displayed. The points will scroll with each key press to view the

points on the list, but the points will not get acknowledged in the database.

DETECTION OPERATION

Smoke sensors shall be smoke density measuring devices having no self

contained alarm set point (fixed threshold). The control panel shall determine

the alarm decision for each sensor. The control panel shall determine the

condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to the stored values.

Alternatively, sensors with builtin microship analysing smoke density is equally

acceptable.

The control panel shall maintain a moving average of the sensors' smoke

chamber value to automatically compensate (move the threshold) for dust and

dirty conditions that could affect detection operations. The system shall

automatically maintain constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each sensor



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 8 of 25

(via the floating threshold) by compensating for environmental factors. The

smoke obscuration sensitivity shall be adjustable.

The system shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs

cleaning. When a sensor's average value reaches a predetermined value, a

"DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be audibly and visually indicated at the

control panel for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED on the sensor base

shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a "DIRTY

SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value increases to a second

predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be

indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. To prevent false alarms,

these "DIRTY" conditions shall in no way decrease the amount of smoke

obscuration necessary for system activation.

The control panel shall continuously perform an automatic self-test routine on

each sensor which will functionally check sensor electronics and ensure the

accuracy of the values being transmitted to the control panel. Any sensor that

fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble condition with the

sensor location at the control panel.

An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the

capability to manually access the following information for each sensor:

a) primary status

b) device type

c) present average value

d) present sensitivity selected*

e) peak detection values*

f) sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

g) Values shall be in "percent of smoke obscuration" format so that the

operator requires no interpretation.

At least 1000 individually identified sensors as well as conventional initiating

device and indicating appliance circuits shall be supported within a single

control panel.

For increased smoke detection assurance, all individually addressed smoke

sensors shall be provided with alarm verification. Only a verified alarm shall

initiate the alarm sequence operation.

LED OPERATION

The alarm LED shall flash on the control panel until the alarm has been

acknowledged.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 9 of 25

Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received

from another zone after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control

panel and the panel display shall show the new alarm information.

A pulsing alarm tone shall occur until acknowledge.

Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received

from another zone after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control

panel and the panel display shall show the new alarm information.

A pulsing alarm tone shall occur until acknowledge.

ALARM VERIFICATION

The activation of any system smoke detector shall initiate an Alarm Verification

operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a

second alarm activation. If, within one (1) minute after resetting, a second alarm

is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process

the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within one minute

the system is to resume normal operation. The Alarm Verification is to operate

only on smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating devices shall be

processed immediately. The alarm verification operation is to be selectable by

device.

The control panel shall have the capability to display the number of times a zone

has gone into a verification mode.

Alarm verification zones shall have the capability of being divided into seven

different groups whereby only two verification zones from a group will confirm the

first activation and cause the panel to follow programmed alarm sequence.

MANUAL EVACUATION

A manual evacuation switch shall be provided to operate the systems alarm

indicating appliances. Other control circuits shall not be activated. However, a

true alarm shall be processed as described previously.

ALARM & TROUBLE CONDITIONS

Alarm and trouble conditions shall be immediately displayed on the control

panel front alphanumeric display. If more alarms or troubles are in the system the

operator may scroll to display new alarms. The system shall have an alarm list key

that will allow the operator to display all alarms, troubles, and supervisory service

conditions with the time of occurrence. This shall allow for the determination of

not only the most recent alarm but also may indicate the path that the fire is

taking.

SUPERVISION

All auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that all switches must be

returned to the normal automatic position to clear system trouble, particularly for

the AHU and pressurization fans.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 10 of 25

Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete panel readout to

indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit.

The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure

must be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote

annunciator A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while

incoming power is present. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low

battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually

indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator.

The System Expansion Modules shall be electrically supervised for module

placement. Should a module become disconnected from the controls, the

system trouble indicator must illuminate and audible trouble signal must sound.

The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually

for maintenance or testing purposes.

POWER REQUIREMENTS

230V AC power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit shall be provided for

each panel.

The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the

entire system upon loss of normal 230 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode

for a period of twenty-four (24) hours with 30 minutes of alarm operation at the

end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby

batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations

shall be automatic.

All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be

individually fused at the control panel.

Batteries shall be of the Sealed lead acid type with a minimum life expectancy of

10 years and mounted in suitable enclosure.

Additional features shall be:

a) Automatic dual – rate charging

b) Ammeter and Voltmeter

c) Charger “ON” indication

d) Charger “failure” indication

e) “High-rate” indication

f) Battery voltage test points

g) Vents cabinet

h) Battery over current protection

MAIN FIRE ALARM COMMAND CENTRE.

The main fire alarm command centre shall have the same features specified

above, but it shall cater for all the circuit connected to it and shall communicate



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 11 of 25

with all the other stand alone panel with the possibility to control all sensors in the

complete system, acknowledge and silence an alarm.

The main fire alarm command centre shall be provided with a spare capacity.

Main fire alarm command centre shall also be connected to the BMS system for

alarm monitoring.

Main fire alarm command centre shall be connected to the BMS system for

communication with the stand alone fire alarm control panel of each building.

FIRE ALARM REPEATER PANEL

The fire alarm repeater panel shall consist of a LED and LCD display to

annunciate all display on the main fire alarm command centre, the panel does

not require to have any control feature.

ADDRESSABLE PERIPHERAL NETWORK

Communication with Addressable devices: The system must provide

communication with all initiating and control devices individually. All of these

devices are to be individually annunciated at the control panel.

Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each point:

a) Alarm

b) Trouble

c) Open

d) Short

e) Ground

f) Device Fail/Or Incorrect Device.

All addressable devices are to have the capability of being disabled or enabled

individually.

Addressable devices may be multidropped from a single pair of wires. Systems

that require factory reprogramming to add or delete devices are unacceptable.

FORMAT

The communication format must be a poll/response protocol to allow t-tapping

of the wire to addressable devices and be completely digital. A high degree of

communication reliability must be obtained by using parity data bit error

checking routines for address codes and check sum routines for the data

transmission protocol. Systems that do not utilize full digital transmission protocol

(i.e.; that may use time pulse width methods to transmit data etc.) will not be

acceptable since they are considered unreliable and prone to errors.

IDENTIFICATION OF ADDRESSABLE DEVICES



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 12 of 25

Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code

entered on each device at time of installation. Hard wire addressable system

shall be preferred in order to maintain the integrity of the system.

Control pushbutton switches - for: alarm silence, alarm acknowledge, supervisory

reset, display time and up to (4) control keys for programmable operation

duplicating the control panel switches. A key “enable” deactivates the control

switches.

Tone alert - Duplicates the control panel tone alert during alarm & trouble

conditions:

System trouble LED

Power on LED

FIRE FIGHTER’S TELEPHONE SYSTEM

System consist of Master Telephone set, Remote Telephone sets, Remote master

telephone, Telephone interface modules, power supply, all required cabling,

control, pull boxes, terminations etc

Master telephone set along with the required no. of telephone interface

modules, LED/LCD indication, control switches, power supply etc shall be part of

the main fire alarm control panel located in the ground floor.

One no. remote master telephone shall be provided at a location to consultant

approval.

System shall provide two way communication between Master and remote fire

fighters telephones. It shall be a 100 % reliable system suitable for application

during active fire fighting conditions, fire alarm investigation, fire alarm system

inspection and testing.

The Master telephone connects directly into a telephone interface module. A

push to talk switch provides the operator with voice input control . Master

telephone uses local LED/LCD indication and switch module to select telephone

circuits and to silence any subsequent call ins until selected.

Remote telephone can call into the master by either being taken off hook or by

plugged into a telephone jack provided for the purpose.

There shall be ring in tone with a visible LED/LCD indicator for each telephone

circuit, and a switch control to select the calling telephone circuit.

Telephone circuits shall be supervised for opens, shorts, and overload conditions.

The master telephone shall be supervised for broken cord or off hook.

Remote telephones shall be provided as cabinet mounted. Each hears a ring

tone when a call in is selected and a hold tone when placed on hold.

System shall be wired in class A configuration. Size and type of cabling shall be as

per system manufacturer’s recommendations and to consultant approval.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 13 of 25

FIRE FIGHTERS SMOKE CONTROL STATION (FSCS)

Fire fighter’s smoke control station (FSCS) shall be part of the fire alarm control

panel and shall be located at the fire control room.

The control station shall include the following features:

a) The fire fighter’s smoke control station shall provide full monitoring and

manual control capability over all smoke control systems and equipment.

b) Equipment shall include but not limited to the following:

i. Smoke Extract Fans.

ii. Staircase Pressurization Fans

iii. Makeup Air Fans

iv. Motorized dampers of the various sub system including makeup

air ducts, smoke extract ducts etc.

c) The control station shall have the highest priority control over all smoke

control systems and equipment. Where manual controls are also

provided at other building locations for control of smoke control systems,

the control mode selected from the FSCS should prevail. FSCS control

should override or bypass other building controls such as hand off auto

and start/stop switches located on fan motor controllers, and controls

intended to protect against electrical overloads, provide for personnel

safety, and prevent major system damage.

d) The fire fighters smoke control station shall contain a building diagram

that clearly indicates the type and location of all smoke control

equipment (fans, dampers, etc.). The building areas affected by the

equipment shall also be clearly indicated.

e) The actual status of the systems and equipment that are activated or are

capable of activation for smoke control shall be clearly indicated at the

fire fighters smoke control station.

f) Status indication shall be provided for on and off status of each individual

fan used for smoke control. ‘ON’ status should be sensed by pressure

difference as proof of airflow.

g) Contractor shall install all the required control and monitoring modules,

relays, for each contactors and power supply etc every system

components to be controlled.

h) Fire rated cables shall be used for the system installation.

PERIPHERAL DEVICES

The automatic fire detectors shall be fixed to the installation by mean of plug-in

bases.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 14 of 25

The two bases shall have a mechanical device enabling the base to be set to

accept only one of the four main type of detectors, i.e. ionisation smoke, optical

smoke, infra-red flame and heat.

The bases shall incorporate the optional feature of being able to lock the

detectors in place once plugged in.

The addressable base must incorporate all the electronics circuitry required for

communicating detector status to the Control Panel.

Addressable detectors and addressable modules shall be able to transmit to the

Control Panel a pre-set and unique identifier to detect unauthorised changes in

the system configuration.

The manufacturer shall have suitable equipment to test and replace all four main

types of automatic detectors.

The manufacturer shall have available intrinsically safe modules for automatic

detectors, the plug-in bases, line isolator & Interface modules.

Detectors with built in microchip complying with the performance specified

hereafter is equally acceptable.

PHOTO ELECTRIC DETECTORS

a) The photoelectric smoke detectors shall be capable of detecting smoke

from fires. The detectors shall have 360 degree smoke entry.

b) The Photo electric smoke detectors shall be U.L listed

c) The design of the optical smoke detectors sensing chamber shall be

optimised to minimise the effect of the dust deposits over a period of time

d) The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate screens designed to

prevent all but the very small insects from entering the sensing chamber.

e) The optical smoke detectors shall include RFI screening and feed-through

connecting components to minimise the effect of radiated and

conducted electrical interference.

f) The optical smoke detectors shall be incorporate an LED, clearly visible

from the outside, to provide indication of alarm actuation.

g) The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate a magnetically operated

functional test facility.

h) The optical smoke detectors shall have EMI/RFI shielded electrons.

i) The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate an LED clearly visible from

the outside, to provide indication of alarm and normal conditions.

HEAT DETECTORS



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 15 of 25

a) The heat detectors shall be capable of self restoring and providing rate of

rise and fixed temperature sensing.

b) The heat detectors shall be U.L listed

c) The heat detectors shall employ two heat-sensing elements with different

thermal characteristics to provide a rate of rise dependent response.

d) The temperature sensing elements and circuitry of the heat detectors

shall be coated with epoxy resin to provide environmental protection.

e) The heat detectors shall incorporate a magnetically operated functional

test facility.

f) The heat detectors shall have EMI/RFI shielded electrons.

g) The heat detectors shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the

outside, to provide indication of alarm and normal conditions.

MANUAL BREAK GLASS CALL POINT

a) The manual call points shall monitor and signal to the Control Panel the

status of a switch operated by a ‘break glass’ assembly with N.O/N.C

contacts.

b) The manual call points shall be U.L approved.

c) The manual call points shall be capable of operating by means of thumb

pressure and not require a hammer.

d) The manual call points shall be field programmable to be alert or

evacuation.

e) The manual call points shall be capable of being tested using a special

‘key’ without the need for shattering the glass.

f) The addressable manual call points shall have built in electronics with dip

switch for addressing.

g) The conventional manual call points shall be connected to addressable

loop through interface modules.

h) The conventional break glass units to be provided in non-conditioned

areas such as workshop area and as shown on drawings.

ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULES

a) The addressable contact interface module shall provide monitoring of the

status of switched input signals from either normally open contacts from

conventional devices.

b) The addressable contact monitoring module shall be capable of deriving

its power directly from the addressable loop or from the control panel.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 16 of 25

c) The addressable contact monitoring module shall be enclosed in a pre-

fabricated enclosure.

LINE ISOLATOR MODULE

a) The line isolator module shall provide protection on the addressable loop

by automatically disconnecting the section of wiring between two

modules where a short-circuit has occurred.

b) The line isolator module shall derive power directly from addressable loop

c) The line isolator module shall be installed for every 15 devices and as

shown in layout drawings.

CIRCUIT PROTECTOR

Circuit protector shall be provided on all fire alarm external wiring. To protect the

system against lightning or high transient voltage. The protector shall be located

as close as practicable to the point at which the circuit leave or enter a building.

The circuit protector shall have line to line response time of less than 1 nano

second and capable of accepting greater than 2000 Ampere at 28 volt.

BEAM DETECTOR

The Beam Detector shall be microprocessor based and shall have automatic

gain control and temperature compensation.

The separate transmitter/receiver shall be capable of long range coverage up to

100 Meter and have six sensitivity level settings.

The detector shall include normal, alarm and trouble LED indicators,

A remote indicator and test unit shall be installed at low level in the corridor to

indicate the status of the beam detector and which will be used to test the alarm

function of the detector.

PHOTOELECTRIC DUCT MOUNTED DETECTOR

Photoelectric duct sensors shall be of the solid state photoelectric type and shall

operate on the light scattering, photodiode principle. To minimize nuisance

alarms, detectors shall have a 30 mesh insect screen and be designed to ignore

invisible particles or smoke densities that are below the factory set point. No

radioactive material shall be used.

FIRE ALARM SOUNDER

a) The fire alarm sounder shall be U.L listed

b) The fire alarm sounder shall be wired directly from the panel in Multi

circuit.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 17 of 25

c) The fire alarm sounder circuits shall be complete with end of line resistors

for maintaining purpose.

d) The fire alarm sounder shall be of the light weight Aluminium alloy

construction, water proof and painted red.

e) The sounder shall be vibrating type with low current consumption

f) The sounder shall be 6” heavy duty suitable for internal and external

operation as required.

g) It shall give a minimum sound level of 90 dB at 1 meter.

h) The fire alarm sounder shall be controlled from the loop. Sequencing of

sounder controls, shall be determined during construction and can be

programmed at control panel.

j) Fire alarm sounder shall be addressable wherever indicated in the

drawing

FIRE ALARM SOUNDER WITH STROBE LIGHT

a) Audible/Visible notification appliance combines a high intensity strobe

with a low current electronic horn.

b) Horn output shall be a steady harmonically rich sound that can be easily

coded by the controlling notification appliance circuit.

c) 24V DC operation

d) UL listed or approved equal.

e) Strobe light shall be of xenon with impact resistant polycarbonate lens.

f) Strobe light intensity shall be selected from manufactures standard

product range depending on the location where it shall be installed and

the area coverage. It shall not be less than 30 candela.

g) It shall be of surface mounting/semi flush mounting.

h) Minimum sound level shall be as PE UL464.

TEMPERATURE

Control Panel : 0° C to 48° C

Peripheral Devices : 10° C to 50° C (For conventional devices).

0° C to 49° C (Addressable devices)

Humidity : 95%

Outdoor Equipment : IP65.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 18 of 25

2.0 VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM

Fire alarm system of the main building shall be provided with a fully integrated

digital emergency voice evacuation system. System shall support up to eight

independent audio channels over a single pair of wires. System shall include but

not limited to the following:

a) Notification appliances such as ceiling speakers, wall mounted speakers,

speakers with strobes, etc

b) Distributed zoned audio amplifiers one for each speaker circuit

c) Paging microphone, digital message playback unit, Digital Audio

controllers, on board tone generators, all required audio zone control and

audio control input modules, power supply, battery etc in the main fire

control panels.

d) Switches, and LED indications for each speaker circuit zone to allow

emergency voice communication selection for Evacuation, Alert and

Paging, and all other switches/indications etc arranged on the fire alarm

control panel.

The system shall be capable of selecting the proper tones and phrases based

upon specific conditions and location, sort and transmit the audible information

and repeat the transmission as many times as required.

The system shall have the ability to generate pre-programmed digitized phrases,

words and alarm tones to all or specific areas of the building. The message

contained in the fully digitized message unit shall have the facility to be edited

and modified or even recorded in the field via a normal computer. System shall

have the capability of massage splicing. Massage splicing shall allow the system

to announciate specific zone and/or device numbers while system is in testing

mode, and shall also allow the system to announciate coded massages

informing the security personnel about the Fire Condition in specific zone or

device.

One-way communications of announcements and messages originating at the

Fire Control Room shall be via speakers located throughout the building. Speaker

shall be wired in class "A" for each floor. One dedicated amplifier shall be

available for each speaker circuit. Each Amplifier shall have it’s own

independent built-in back-up amplifier. The system shall have the ability to

automatically or manually sound the evacuation tone on the floor of alarm,

while at the same time being able to sound the first stage alert tone or voice

instruction to other areas of the building.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 19 of 25

The system shall be configured to allow voice paging. Upon activation of any

speaker manual control switch, the alarm tone shall be sounded over all

speakers in that group.

The control panel operator shall be able to make announcements via the push-

to-talk paging microphone over the pre-selected speakers.

Facility for total building paging shall be accomplished by the means of an “All

Call” switch.

MICROPHONE

The Microphones shall be a push-to-talk, dynamic noise canceling type with a

frequency response from 200 to 2,000 HZ. Any automatic alarm, which has been

in operation, shall be overridden by the use of the microphone. When the

manual voice announcements are completed the system shall revert back to the

previous alarm unless reset or restored to normal by authorities in charge.

AMPLIFIER

All amplifiers shall be sized to accommodate the speaker load plus an additional

20% spare per speaker zone to accommodate future addition. Minimum 2 watt

shall be considered for each speaker in sizing the amplifier.

Voltage ( 25V, 70.7V ) and power rating of the amplifiers shall be as per system

manufacturer recommendations. Size and type of power and control cables for

the speaker circuits shall be selected accordingly.

The amplifier shall be continuously supervised for proper operation. Each audio

power amplifier shall have integral audio signal de-multiplexes, allowing the

amplifier to select any one of eight digitized audio channels. The channel

selection shall be directed by the system software. Up to 8 multiple and different

audio signals must be able to broadcast simultaneously from the same system

network panel.

Amplifiers shall have built-in Back-up amplifier. Incase of Primary amplifier failure,

speakers circuits shall automatically gets connected to back-up amplifier and

system operation continues without interruption. In the event of a total loss of

audio data communications, all amplifiers will default to the local "HORN" tone. If

the local panel has an alarm condition, then all amplifiers will sound the Horn

signal on their connected speaker circuits. Audio amplifiers shall automatically

detect a short circuit condition on the connected speaker circuit wiring, and shall

inhibit itself from driving into that short circuit condition.

Frequency range: 200 Hz to 12 KHz

SPEAKERS

Ceiling recessed speakers and wall mounted speakers shall be provided in the

corridors/common areas as indicated in the relevant drawings.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 20 of 25

All speakers shall be listed to UL1480. The speakers shall have taps for ¼, ½, 1,

and 2 watts. Multiple tap speaker having taps up to 4 watt shall be provided if

required.

All speakers shall have high impact, flame retardant housings. Ceiling speakers

shall be of white/off white, and wall mounted speakers shall be of white or red to

local authority approval.

Frequency response: 400 Hz to 4000Hz or better

Sound Pressure Level at 1W as per UL1480 test: 84 dBA at 10 feet

Humidity 95%

Temperature range 0 to 40 degree C

SPEAKER / STROBE

It combines a multi tapped speaker ( as specified above ) and an individually

addressed strobe to provide audio/tone notification and visible notification from

the same unit.

Speaker with strobe shall be provided as indicated in the relevant drawings.

Speaker/strobes shall have a synchronized strobe light with multiple candela taps

in addition to the speaker having characteristics specified above. The strobe light

taps shall be adjustable for 15/75,30/75, 75 and 110 candela. When activated,

the strobe shall flash at a synchronized rate

It shall be UL listed to standard 1971, and standard 1480.

Temperature range: 0 to 50 degree C

Humidity 93%

High impact, flame retardant housing and shall be red or white to local authority

requirements.

Speakers shall be wired separately from the addressable strobe wiring.

AUDIO CONTROLLER INPUT MODULES

System Audio Controller shall have the Input modules to interface with

Background Music Inputs. System will be used for normal Public Address

operation during normal hours. In case of Fire Alarm, all background music inputs

will be muted and highest priority Evacuation massage will be transmitted to

area of Fire and Alert Messages to other areas. Each input shall be provided with

volume control to control the input level of background music sources.

3.0 GRAPHIC COMMAND CENTER

A colour graphic command center shall be installed in control room. When a fire

alarm status changes, colour graphics shall display an indication of the type of

alarm or other activity and its location. The operator then uses the mouse control



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 21 of 25

to access a more detailed view of the alarmed zone or device. With proper

access code, the operator shall be able to acknowledge alarm conditions,

silence audible alarms and extinguish visible notification appliances, and perform

system reset directly from the colour graphic screens. GCC shall accommodate

upto 4 network card and each network capable of accomodating upto 99

notes.

The graphic command center shall use IBM compatible PC The PC shall have a

Pentium IV processor operating at 2 GHz minimum, 512 MB RAM, 40GB HDD and

a 17" SVGA monitor with graphics hardware acceleration. The PC and

Peripherals shall be from manufacturer such as Dell, Compaq etc. Locally

assembled equipment will not be accepted.

It shall provide history logging upto 400,000 historical events, on line A4 laser

printer capable of printing at a speed of at least 10ppm. Graphics shall also be

exchanged to control workstation.

4.0 INSTALLATION

Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications,

all applicable codes, local authority requirements and the manufacturer's

recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the

provisions of NEC - Article 760 A and C, Power-Limited Fire Protective Signaling

Circuits or if required may be reclassified as non-power limited and wired in

accordance with NEC-Article 760 A and B. Upon completion, the contractor shall

so certify in writing to the Consultant and general contractor. All junction boxes

shall be sprayed red and labeled "Fire Alarm". Wiring colour code shall be

maintained throughout the installation.

Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract

shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.

The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of

the fire alarm equipment after completion of the installation.

The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on site supervision of

installation.

TYPE OF CABLES

Fire resistant FP200 cables complying with BS 6387 Category CWZ shall be used

for the wiring of the fire alarm system. The cabling shall be carried out in class A

configuration. Cable running through walls, ceilings, roofs etc shall be provided

with fire stops.

CABLING AND WIRING

The installation of all wiring, cable and equipment shall be in accordance with

NFPA 70. National Electric Code and specifically with Article 760, Fire Protection

signaling systems and in accordance with the local codes and standards.

Wiring for the fire detection and alarm system shall be segregated from all

lighting and power systems.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 22 of 25

Wiring within any control equipment shall be readily accessible without removing

any components or parts.

All internal fire alarm cabling shall be fire resistant FP 200 cables or equal.

Wiring for 240 V AC power to each FCP shall be minimum 2.5 mm2. Wiring for all

bell circuits shall be minimum 2.5 mm2 and wiring for all signaling circuits shall be

minimum 1.5 mm2.

Wiring between FCP’s and ACP’s shall be minimum 2.5 mm2 and shall be

armoured.

Wiring between FCP’s for networking shall be 1.5 mm2 twisted pairs cables.

Wiring for the telephone circuits shall be minimum 1.5 sq.mm twisted.

Wiring for the speaker circuits shall be minimum 1.5 sq.mm twisted and shall meet

UL 2196 requirements.

All cabling shall be concealed in the building fabric for all conditioned areas.

Fire alarm system cables shall be installed using PVC conduits embedded in the

slab/wall. All surface mounted installation shall be using GI conduits.

Exposed installation of fire alarm system cable is not acceptable.

Where cables pass through walls or floors, then shall be protected by galvanized

steel sleeves.

5.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

PRELIMINARY TESTS

Upon the completion of the installation, the system shall be subject to functional

and operation performance tests including test of each installed initiating and

notification appliance. Tests shall include the meggering of all system conductors

to determine that the system is free from grounded, shorted or open circuits.

The megger test shall be conducted prior to the installation of fire alarm

equipment. If deficiencies are found corrections shall be made and the system

shall be retested to assure that it functions.

ACCEPTANCE TEST

Provide the service of competent, factory – trained Engineer or technician

authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically

supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and commissioning of the

system. Testing shall be in full accordance with NEPA 72 Section 7.2.2 :



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 23 of 25

a) Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections

and test for short circuits, earth faults, continuity and insulation.

b) Verify activation of all flow switches.

c) Open initiating device circuits and verify that the fault signal actuates.

d) Open signaling line circuits and verify that the fault signal actuates.

e) Open and short indicating appliance circuits and verify that fault signal

actuates.

f) Earth initiating device circuits and verify response of fault signals.

g) Earth signaling line circuits and verify response of fault signals.

h) Earth indicating appliance circuits and verify response of fault signals.

i) Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.

j) Check installation, supervision and operation of all intelligent smoke

sensors during a walk test.

k) Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should

be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper

processing of the signal at the Fire Panel and the correct activation of

the control points.

CONDUCTOR TESTING

Prior to connection of the equipment all conductors shall be tested in the

following manner.

Verify absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors.

Insulation test : To ensure that all conductor other than those intentionally

connected together and completely isolated.

SYSTEM TESTING

Verify that the control unit is in the normal supervisory condition as detailed in the

manufacturers manual.

Test each initiating device and indicating appliance for alarm operation and

trouble indication.

Test the operation of control module for proper response

Test all primary power supplies.

Test all secondary power supply



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 24 of 25

Verify that each test signal is properly reported and received at the main fire

alarm panel.

Functional tests to verify the interfacing details with all other systems as described

in item ‘1.2.description of works’ and confirm whether the interfacing logic and

sequence of operation is as per Consultant approved programme.

Fire Alarm Schedule to be completed by the Vendor during tender. One

schedule to be completed for each panel

Control Panel Features Response

Operator’s Panel:

LCD

Keypad

Programmable Control Keys

Supervisory LED

Printer

Total I/O Point Capacity

Conventional Circuits:

Initiating Circuits

Indicating Appliance

Auxiliary Relay with built in feedback

No. of Loops

Number

Distance (Style 4)

Addressable points

Meters

System

Battery

Industry Listings

UL 864 (fire)

NFPA 72 Series

FM

Software Features

Field configurable

Passcode levels

Custom labels

Time Control

Alarm verification – by group

One man walk test by group silent with

log with zone indication

Historical log alarm events

trouble events

Trouble reminder – programmable

Addressable Devices Feature:

Detectors

Photoelectric

Heat

Duct

Analog



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 25 of 25

Control Panel Features Response

Address Location

Base

Interchangeable heads

W/alarm LED

W/remote LED output

W/auxiliary relay

W/sounder

Manual Station

Control Modules

Isolator Module


CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 1 of 17

SECTION 16




Page 2 of 17

SECTION 16


INDEX

1.0 CCTV SYSTEM



Page 3 of 17

1.0 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM

1.1 IP CAMERA DOME FEATURES

The IP camera dome shall transmit high quality video across the network for remote

viewing and recording. It shall be powered by a proprietary digital video management

system.

The dome shall have a maximum video transmission rate of 30 fps (25 fps PAL) at 640 x

480 pixels (768 x 576 PAL).

The dome shall use optimized proprietary compression based on MPEG4 that optimizes

data and maximizes picture quality.

Simultaneous transmission of multiple channel video across the LAN and WAN (Internet)

to connected network digital video recorders and master workstations shall be

provided.

The dome shall be configurable remotely from network digital video recorders and

master workstations.

Single channel audio for communications and recording shall be provided.

The dome shall be capable of 5 simultaneous viewing/recording streams per camera.

Museum Search (Smart Search) feature shall scan hours of video in minutes.

MD5 128-bit algorithm video authentication shall ensure data integrity.

The LAN interface shall be 100 Mbps, TCP/IP Unicast.

Video Bandwidth shall be 1.5 Mbps (per video stream), nominal.

Up to 16 cameras shall be able to be displayed on a remote workstation.

Adjustment of fps according to network performance capability shall not sacrifice

quality.

Control of operation and recording from a macro shall be available.

Levels of user authorization for different functions shall be provided.

Remote software updates for the camera dome and the IP version shall be available.

Watch dog option shall cause a reboot when system is not responding.

PTZ control from application over Ethernet shall be provided.

Alarm report shall be able to run a response macro. External alarms shall be provided.

DHCP support shall be provided.



Page 4 of 17

Definition of movement in a specific area (region-of-interest) from a workstation shall

available.

Video motion detection shall be provided.

An embedded self-supported OS shall be provided.

1.2 Standard Indoor Camera Dome Features

The motorized dome shall have internal CPU-circuitry that shall provide for an external

power supply input, four alarm inputs, one relay output and communications wiring. On-

board memory shall be retained in the housing; installation and servicing shall be easy.

Alarm inputs shall be individually programmable for their functional state (enabled or

disabled), reporting state (report on or off), active state (high or low), acknowledge

mode (manual, momentary or automatic), automatic acknowledge dwell time control,

set and reset action (action when triggered or reset) and displayed title text. The relay

output shall be programmable for its power-on state (on or off), output type (momentary

or latching) and displayed title text.

Programmable titling shall be provided for the camera and every preset position, alarm,

relay, and sector.

Titles shall be enabled or disabled individually or globally. The overall position of the titles

and display frame position shall be programmable. The capability to fade titles after a

programmable time shall be provided.

There shall be 79 programmable preset positions available, each having a variable

preset solve speed of 1 sec (nominal) and accuracy of 0.23°. The dome's 360 degree

view shall be programmable for a maximum of 16 sectors. Each sector shall have the

capability to be blanked out (no video display). The number and size of sectors shall be

programmable and have a custom title.

There shall be four tours available with 32 steps per tour. Tour steps shall include preset

positions with speed control, relay control, alarm acknowledge, save/recall camera

status, repeat tour, call another tour, call an autotour and dwell timing control.

Pan and tilt functions shall be externally controlled, continuously variable and

programmable to be enabled or disabled manual pan limits shall be programmable.

There shall be an autopan feature and it shall be programmable for its functional

settings (enabled, disabled speed, limits). Maximum manual pan and tilt speeds shall be

programmable. Maximum pan speed shall be 120 degrees/sec and maximum tilt speed

shall be 90 degrees/sec. Pan and tilt speeds shall also be scalable to the zoom setting.

The zoom function speed shall be externally controlled using three settings, low, medium

and high.

The camera-lens module shall be a 1/4 inch, high-resolution color type. Camera

sensitivity shall be 0.2 lux. The lens on the standard cameras shall have a maximum

optical zoom setting of 22X and a maximum digital zoom setting of 12X for a total zoom

setting of 264X. Lens focal length shall be 4-88 mm with a maximum aperture of f/1.6. The

digital zoom shall be programmable for its functional setting (enable/disable). An autoiris

function with a manual override feature and an auto-focus function with functional

setting control (enable/disable) shall also be provided.



Page 5 of 17

In addition, the camera shall provide high level, programmable functions. The autoiris

shall be adjustable. The shutter speed shall be automatic or manual. The automatic

shutter speed shall work with an auto exposure feature. This feature can be set to

operate with a fully automatic shutter speed or a fixed, selectable, linear speed. These

features are called exposure priority or shutter priority. All color cameras shall have white

balance gain using red and blue scales. Backlight compensation shall be

programmable for its relative setting using a tuning value scale. Video line locking shall

be provided with an internal crystal clock or a programmable vertical phase scale.

The basic ceiling mounted version shall be designed to mount into any dropped or hard

ceiling having the capacity to support the dome's weight. There shall be an optional

mounting kit for ceilings not able to support the dome's weight.

The indoor pendant version shall be mounted using a molded thermoplastic housing and

1-1/2 inch NPT threaded fitting.

A real time clock shall be available.

Multilanguage menu system shall be provided, including English, and Arabic.

The camera dome system shall have the following mechanical specifications:

1. Dimensions: Indoor Ceiling

Diameter: 7.1-in. (180 mm).

Height: 9.7-in. (246 mm).

Indoor Pendant


Height: 10.0-in. (254 mm).

2. Weight: Indoor Ceiling: 5.1 lb (2.3 kg).

Indoor Pendant: 4.7 lb (2.1 kg).

Construction: Plastic, aluminum and steel.

4. Color: White housing, black trim ring, gray (smoked), chrome or gold dome for

the

indoor version, clear dome for the outdoor version.

Environmental parameters shall be: 32 to 132° F (0 to 55° C).

1.3 Day/Night Outdoor Camera Dome Features

The motorized dome shall have internal CPU-circuitry that shall provide for an external

power supply input, four alarm inputs, one relay output and communications wiring. On-

board memory shall be retained in the housing; installation and servicing shall be easy.

Alarm inputs shall be individually programmable for their functional state (enabled or

disabled), reporting state (report on or off), active state (high or low), acknowledge

mode (manual, momentary or automatic), automatic acknowledge dwell time control,

set and reset action (action when triggered or reset) and displayed title text. The relay

output shall be programmable for its power-on state (on or off), output type (momentary

or latching) and displayed title text.

Programmable titling shall be provided for the camera and every preset position, alarm,

relay, and sector.



Page 6 of 17

Titles shall be enabled or disabled individually or globally. The overall position of the titles

and display frame position shall be programmable. The capability to fade titles after a

programmable time shall be provided.

There shall be 79 programmable preset positions available, each having a variable

preset solve speed of 1 sec (nominal) and accuracy of 0.23°. The dome's 360 degree

view shall be programmable for a maximum of 16 sectors. Each sector shall have the

capability to be blanked out (no video display). The number and size of sectors shall be

programmable and have a custom title.

There shall be eight tours available with 32 steps per tour. Tour steps shall include preset

positions with speed control, relay control, alarm acknowledge, save/recall camera

status, repeat tour, call another tour, call an autotour and dwell timing control. There

shall be two autotours available with 256 pan, tilt and zoom functions per autotour.

Timing shall be dynamic or as is actually programmed with the joystick and push buttons.

Pan and tilt functions shall be externally controlled, continuously variable and

programmable to be enabled or disabled manual pan limits shall be programmable.

There shall be an autopan feature and it shall be programmable for its functional

settings (enabled, disabled speed, limits). Maximum manual pan and tilt speeds shall be

programmable. Maximum pan speed shall be 360 degrees/sec and maximum tilt speed

shall be 150 degrees/sec. Pan and tilt speeds shall also be scalable to the zoom setting.

The zoom function speed shall be externally controlled using three settings, low, medium

and high.

The camera-lens module shall be a 1/4 inch, high-resolution color type. Camera

sensitivity shall be 0.0019 fc (0.02 lux). The lens on the day/night cameras shall have a

maximum optical zoom setting of 23X and a maximum digital zoom setting of 12X for a

total zoom setting of 276. Lens focal length shall be 3.6-82.8 mm, with a maximum

aperture of f/1.6. The digital zoom shall be programmable for its functional setting

(enable/disable). An autoiris function with a manual override feature and an auto-focus

function with functional setting control (enable/disable) shall also be provided. The 23X

camera shall feature wide dynamic range to provide the highest quality image with

excellent contrast.

In addition, the camera shall provide high level, programmable functions. The autoiris

and AGC shall be adjustable. The shutter speed shall be automatic or manual. The

automatic shutter speed shall work with an auto exposure feature. This feature can be

set to operate with a fully automatic shutter speed or a fixed, selectable, linear speed.

These features are called exposure priority or shutter priority. All color cameras shall have

white balance gain using red and blue scales. Backlight compensation shall be

programmable for its relative setting using a tuning value scale. Video line locking shall

be provided with an internal crystal clock or a programmable vertical phase scale.

The outdoor pendant model shall be mounted using a die cast aluminum housing and

1-1/2 inch NPT threaded fitting and shall include a molded thermoplastic sunshield and

additional environmental control.

A real time clock and scheduler shall be available on all models. Up to 64 events shall

be able to be scheduled for action at a programmed time of day. Events that may be

scheduled include a preset, turning a relay on or off, enabling or disabling an alarm, and

calling a tour or an autotour



Page 7 of 17

16 individual zoom-scalable programmable privacy masks shall be available.

Programmable azimuth and compass display shall be available. The compass shall be

programmed for absolute North and shall display 8 compass headings (N, NE, E, SE, S,

SW, W, NW). Pan and tilt degrees shall be displayed with a 1° resolution.

Motion detection capability shall be available for the day/night camera. For each

preset, there are 6 programmable zones for motion detection. Each zone has 3 sensitivity

levels. Programmable actions may be associated with each detection zone, including

calling another preset, turning a relay on or off, and calling a tour or an autotour.

The capability to freeze an image during a preset solve shall be available on the

day/night cameras. The control shall be global and affect all preset solves. The freeze of

an image during solve has advantages when recording using a motion compensated

recording system (DVR).

The capability to flip (invert) the video image shall be available on the day/night

cameras. This feature is useful when mounting units in an inverted position. All pan/tilt

and compass displays are automatically adjusted for the inverted image.

Multilanguage menu system shall be provided, including English, and Arabic.

The camera dome system shall have the following mechanical specifications:

1. Dimensions: Outdoor Pendant


Height: 10.3-in. (262 mm).

Lower Dome


2. Weight: Outdoor Pendant: 7.7 lb (3.5 kg).

3. Construction: Plastic, aluminum and steel.

4. Color: White housing, black trim ring, clear dome for the outdoor

version.

Environmental parameters shall be: -29 to 165° F (-34 to 74° C) in accordance with NEMA

2.1.5.1 STD 2; -40 to 132° F (-40 to 55° C) continuous rotation.

Indoor, In-Ceiling, Color Fixed-Position Camera Domes

The fixed camera dome shall incorporate a fixed camera and auto iris varifocal lens

combination. The camera domes shall be available for indoor in-ceiling mounting

configurations. A smoked lower dome shall be included.

The camera position shall have a four direction adjustment, allowing for adjustment of

pan, tilt, vertical height in the dome and lens rotation (roll), for any angle of view

required.

The color camera shall accept 24 VAC power input and shall offer line lock capability.

The camera shall be a 1/3-inch format CCD camera.

The color cameras shall have 540 TV lines resolution and 0.019 fc (0.2 lux) sensitivity.



Page 8 of 17

All cameras shall have electronic shutter and shall be fitted with a 3-6 mm auto iris

varifocal lens.

Input Voltage : 13-28 VAC (24 VAC nominal), Non-isolated.

Current Rating : 300 mA at 24 VAC.

Power Consumption : 7.2 W.

Connectors : Power: 3-pin terminal block. Video: BNC,

Video Output Impedance : 75 ohms.

Scanning System : CCIR/PAL: 625 lines, 50 fields/sec.

R. F. Emission Rating : FCC Class A.

Tilt & Horizontal Adjustment : 4 axis adjustment, pan, tilt, vertical height and roll

Construction : Plastic and steel.

Operating Temp. Range : 35 to 104° F (2 to 40° C).

Operating Humidity : Up to 90% relative, noncondensing.

Image Device : 1/3" ExView™ CCD, 2:1 interlace,

Resolution (TV lines) : 460

Sensitvity fc (lux) : 0.019 (0.2) at 25 IRE, f/1.2

Electronic Iris (sec) : 1/60 (1/50)-1/100,000

Signal-to-Noise Ratio : >48 dB (AGC off)

Focal Length (mm) : 3-6 varifocal with auto iris

1.4. Fixed IP Cameras

The camera shall be a 1/4-inch solid-state high-resolution color video camera using an

interline transfer charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensor with DSP (Digital Signal

Processing).

The television operating system available shall be PAL.

The pickup device shall have over 437,000 pixel array (752 horizontal, 582 vertical).

RJ-45 Ethernet connector for connection to the Ethernet network directly.

It shall be compatible with auto-iris lenses with self-contained auto iris control circuits and

provide screw terminals for cable connection to this type of lens. It also shall have an

internal auto iris control circuit for use with DC-drive auto iris lenses and shall provide a

built-in connector for this lens type.

It shall accept lenses having both C- and CS-type mounts.

Camera mounting provisions shall include a 1/4-20 threaded hole. Top and bottom

mounting shall be provided.

Horizontal resolution shall be 540 TV lines.

Signal-to-noise ratio shall be greater than 48 dB (AGC off).

A gray scale of 256 shall be provided.

The camera shall incorporate a color balance sensor which reads the color temperature

of the light through the lens. Through-the-lens white balance for color temperatures shall

be automatic (3000 - 7000 K).



Page 9 of 17

The electronic iris control mode shall be an automatic linear shutter 1/50 to 1/100,000

sec.

At an output level of usable video (25 IRE), the camera shall have a sensitivity of 0.035 fc

(0.38 lux) at standard gain and 0.02 fc (0.42 lux) at high gain. (Conditions: scene

illumination, f/1.2 lens, 89.9% scene highlight reflectance.)

Backlight compensation shall be switch-selectable on or off.

Synchronization shall be power lines phase locking (line-locking) with vertical phase

adjustment or internal crystal.

The camera shall conform to the radiation standards of FCC Class A and IEC1146-1

standard for non-broadcast signal-sensor cameras.

Input power for the camera shall be 24 V, 60 Hz (NTSC) or 24 V, 50 Hz (PAL) with entry

through a screw terminal block. Power consumption shall not exceed 4 W.

1.5 Outdoor Fixed Camera

Outdoor cameras shall have identical specifications to the indoor units, but shall be

enclosed in weatherproof housings and installed on suitable mounts.

1.6 Lenses

All lenses on fixed cameras shall be 1/3 inch format varifocal lenses with Auto iris to

assure a good video image regardless of changes in scene illumination. Focal length of

the lens shall be field selectable and shall vary between 3.5 - 8mm.

1.7 Digital Video Recording Management and Network Software

The Digital Video Recording and Management Network Software shall meet the

requirements of business and government surveillance applications. The software shall

be unique and power a line of Digital Video Recorders, Servers and Workstations. The

Software shall be available on CD-R format and provide a complete and

comprehensive application for the operation and maintenance of the video

surveillance system. It shall provide full live digital video and audio surveillance over a

standard 100Base-T network by the use of a GUI incorporating video display areas,

toolbars, control palettes, and site/device trees.

The Software shall also be available preloaded in a Workstation. This workstation shall be

a preconfigured state-of-the-art PC ready to review and record video over the LAN and

WAN (Internet), with proper registration.

The software shall offer network connectivity to other family components that share all

video and control data over the Ethernet network. The number of network-connected

components is only limited to the number of assigned IP addresses.

The software, without any degradation to video quality, shall simultaneously offer:

16-Channel continuous video playback.

16-Channel video playback transmission to the Ethernet network.



Page 10 of 17

16-Channel continuous video receiving from the Ethernet network.

User selectable video archiving of pre-existing recording.

The operating system of the software shall be Microsoft® WindowsXP™ Professional.

Network Setup: Standard network protocol type using IP addressing scheme.

Site Authorization: Workstation can be setup using remote recorder or workstation GUI.

Site name and authorization can be established by User and Group. Permissions can be

assigned for all system functions.

Macro Create & Edit: System macros can be added, edited, and deleted using the

recorder's cameras and detectors. In addition, within macros, alarms can be sent and

remote macros run.

Alarm Setup: Recorder alarms can be established by adding detectors and configuring

motion detection on video. The triggering of the recorder's detectors is used to send

alarms to remote units. In addition, detectors can be edited and deleted.

Device Settings: The Server's cameras, microphones and sensors can be named.

Cameras can be setup as PTZ types and full descriptions can be assigned.

Authentication: The video from the recorder's cameras can be enabled to view the

Authentication status symbol (A) on the displayed video.

The software shall employ a compression algorithm based on:

Optimized MPEG4 and JPEG.

User selectable resolution (quality) not requiring a need to restart the application or the

digital video recorder. It shall be selectable using a 4-position bar, from the Main Screen.

There shall be 4 levels of resolution (Frame, Field, CIF, and HCIF) with 2 levels of

compression (Normal, Full) comprising 8 quality levels total, which shall be accessible

from the Setup menu selections.

The networked system shall be comprised of:

The software platform.

Recorders.

Workstations.

The software installed in both recorders and workstations shall be similar in:

Graphical User Interface, therefore an operator shall need to learn only one interface for

both control and programming of the system.

Functions, offering the ability to remotely configure most system components from any

recorder or workstation.



Page 11 of 17

The software shall offer features including the simultaneous display, playback, distribution

and archive of multiple channel video and audio. It shall collect multiple channels of

analog video and digitize them for the purpose of display, archive and requested

distribution across the Ethernet network. Cameras, microphones and sensors shall be the

primary analog input devices. Each channel of video and audio data shall have the

capability of being displayed, played back, distributed and archived simultaneously

across several servers and clients across the network. Each sensor channel shall support

a NO or NC device. The software shall also have full WAN and Internet capability,

offering expandability beyond a corporate LAN.

Authorization rights setup shall be performed using the Site Authorization screen. Group

rights shall be available to configure, by specific site. Rights shall provide authority to

perform all system functions. The software shall offer a full multi-user authorization process

as follows:

User groups shall be created once globally and shall function in all components

connected to the network.

Users shall be created once globally and shall be given rights to particular groups.

Groups shall be authorized and given specific access to each unit, permitting "function-

specific" profiles.

Users created and authorized for each machine shall be able to login to any recorder

and workstation and automatically have their group rights for that machine follow them.

There shall be no virtual limit on the number of Groups and Users that can be authorized

in the software.

The software shall allow for each group to be authorized or denied access, per

component, to:

Login.

Logout.

Setup:

Network Setup & Site Name.

User and Group Management.

Site Authorization.

Auto Login.

Macro - Create & Edit.

Alarm Setup.

Authentication Settings.

Device Setup.

Pre & Post Alarm.

Storage Database Utilities.

Auto Record.

Exit to OS.

RS-232 Setup.

Priority Setup.

Registration Setup.

Manual Record Setup.

Scheduler for Macros.



Page 12 of 17

Reports.

Scheduler/Macro.

Shutdown/Close.

Record.

Stop.

Change Quality.

Picture.

Export.

Print.

Controls.

Live View.

Playback.

PTZ

All users created shall be able to Login to any workstation on the system. A user, given

appropriate access, shall be able to remotely configure all components connected to

the network. The programming shall include the complete operation of the recorders,

including but not limited to:

Camera titles.

Alarm conditions.

System reports.

PTZ Control.

Relays.

Alarms.

The Main Window shall provide the following:

The Site and Device Tree depicting all recorders, servers and workstations connected to

the network.

Within the Site and Device Tree, each unit shall be depicted with all connected devices

such as:

Cameras connected, differentiating between PTZ and fixed cameras.

Microphones.

A multiscreen display area that allows for screen displays of:

Single Camera.

Quad.

3 x 3.

4 x 4.

6 way.

Full screen of any of the above selected multi screens shall allow for the viewing of the

particular multiscreen in full screen mode by hiding the graphical user interface.

PTZ Controls:

When a dome camera is selected, an operator shall be able to :

Control pan, tilt, zoom, iris and focus.

Execute preset positions.



Page 13 of 17

Program preset positions.

Complete programming of menus embedded in the selected dome.

All PTZ programming and control shall be achieved remotely without requiring an

operator to be present at the recorder the PTZ camera is connected to.

PTZ control shall be performed dynamically onscreen, not requiring an operator to click

on arrows to move the PTZ camera.

The PTZ control shall be fully variable by dynamically moving the cursor across the video

display.

Access to all programming menus.

User selectable resolution shall include capture sizes of:

320 x 120 pixels, 384 x 144, PAL.

320 x 240 pixels, 384 x 288, PAL.

640 x 240 pixels, 768 x 288, PAL.

640 x 480 pixels, 768 x 576, PAL.

On-demand recording of video currently viewed shall allow for the recording of any

camera from any recorder connected to the network.

The Site and Device Tree shall provide a physical list of all known network site areas and

connected cameras, PTZ cameras and microphones. The cameras, PTZ cameras and

microphones shall be represented by graphical symbols. Components in the Site and

Device Tree shall be selectable and configurable. PTZ controls shall offer:

When a dome camera is selected, an operator shall be able to:

Control Pan, Tilt, Zoom, Iris and Focus.

Execute preset positions.

Program preset positions.

Complete programming of menus embedded in the selected dome.

All PTZ programming and control shall be achieved remotely without requiring an

operator to be physically located at the recorder the PTZ is connected to.

PTZ control shall be performed on the video screen without the need for an operator to

click on any arrows depicting direction of the device to be moved.

The PTZ control shall be fully variable and shall permit an operator to obtain higher pan

and tilt speeds by simply clicking-and-dragging the mouse cursor on the video screen.

Viewing of live cameras shall be performed by:

Clicking on the desired camera in the Site and Device Tree.

"Drag-and-drop" operations of cameras from the Site and Device Tree to the

appropriate multiscreen space.

"Drag-and-drop" operation of the recorder from the Site and Device Tree to the

appropriate multiscreen space.

The software shall permit viewing of live video from:

Any camera connected to any recorder on the network.



Page 14 of 17

The software shall allow for duplicate recording over the network.

All workstations shall be able to simultaneously record:

All cameras physically connected to recorders at a maximum of:

240 fps at 640 x 480 pixel resolution, 768 x 576, PAL (depending on the recorder utilized).

The Navigator Window shall graphically display recorded video. It shall contain all

function buttons necessary to access the video on-screen. These functions include but

are not limited to:

A scalable timeline shall be available to define "from" and "to" time/date intervals of

video and audio.

Cameras and microphones shall be selected from the Navigator Tree and displayed in

the timeline.

The display mode shall be selected from a palette to configure the number of cameras

played back.

A "Create AVI" button shall be used to create an AVI type file of the selected single

camera video segment.

A "Museum Search" button shall be available to search selected video segments for

"Area of Interest" AOI events using a scalable sensitivity setting.

A Play button shall be available to display the Main Window with the Video Display Area

containing the selected video segments ready for review.

Video retrieval in the Navigator Window shall be performed by:

Selecting the Display Mode for required number of cameras.

Selecting the device (recorder or workstation) that video was previously stored on or

archived to.

Selecting the cameras and microphones to be played back.

By "Drag-and-Drop", similar to the live view, selected cameras and microphones are

inserted into the multiscreen displays so that an operator can view a mix of previously

recorded cameras and live video on the same screen.

The timeline shall provide a graphical interface depicting color-coded bars that indicate

video previously recorded as well as all alarmed video and audio.

Any recorders on the network shall be capable of playing back, by utilizing the

multiscreen displays, a mix of videos previously recorded on any other server on the

network, or archived.

The Navigator Window shall offer the ability to playback cameras:

One by one.



Page 15 of 17

Time synchronized (precise timeline the cameras were recorded in).

Access to programming and more advanced screens shall be done by means of an

immobile, permanently docked toolbar located on the top live screen. The Toolbar shall

provide access to the following major functionality of the system:

The Scheduler/Macro.

Reports.

Setup.

Logout and Shutdown buttons.

The software shall provide an advanced method for creating and executing extensive

software commands. This shall be achieved by the use of macros. Macro configuration

shall be defined for recorded cameras and microphones, command duration, recording

location, local viewing, device ID, picture quality, refresh mode, recording rate (fps),

related devices (sensors) and alarm activation.

Macros shall allow an authorized user to create and schedule software commands that

shall include but are not limited to:

Sequencing cameras, including multiscreen displays, in a local and remote recorder.

Execute remote macros existing on recorders currently connected to the network.

Record cameras at different qualities and frame rates from any recorder on the network.

Send alarm condition to any recorder and workstation on the network. By the use of

macros, an authorized user shall be able to program the destination component of the

alarm condition.

An authorized user shall be able to program and execute macros remotely without the

need to be physically located at the recorder that the macros will be programmed on.

The Schedule/Macro button, shall allow the running of preconfigured combinations of

camera, sensor and PTZ programmed routines.

Macro scheduling shall include but is not limited to:

Days of the week when a macro is active.

Start and end time for when a macro is active.

If a macro is to run continuously or not.

A macro shall be able to run every:

5 min, 10 min, 1/4 Hour, 1/2 Hour, 3/4 Hour, 1 Hour, 2 Hours, 3 Hours, 4 Hours, 6 Hours, 8

Hours, 12 Hours.

A macro shall be able to be scheduled to run for 1-256 cycles.

The network and sites configuration shall allow:



Page 16 of 17

Setup of a system Nucleus and Backup Nucleus. The Backup Nucleus shall act as the

hot-standby Nucleus in the event that the primary Nucleus goes offline, providing

uninterrupted system functionality. A Network Settings menu shall provide a

comprehensive worksheet for each networked device. When all units have been setup,

the resulting connected devices shall define the site.

Time synchronization of all components on the network.

All appropriate networking features including, each server IP, Subnet and Gateway.

Device configuration shall have the ability to be configured for system recognition and

operation. Valid devices shall be:

Cameras; fixed or with integrated PTZ.

Microphones.

Sensors.

All devices shall be assigned a unique ID number and title descriptor. PTZ cameras shall

be setup for RS-422 protocol and supported with existing manufacturer's drivers where

applicable.

Storage Database Utilities shall allow setup and usage of detected hard disks locally.

Any networked recorder, workstation or server shall be a candidate to add to the

picture database. Once established, any recorder shall use established hard disks for

recording data.

Authentication shall be configured using the Authentication Settings screen.

Authentication display shall be configured by site and affect the destination video. A

check box shall be available to enable video authentication and view the status of the

video generated. The video authentication scheme shall utilize a 128 bit MD5 algorithm.

The software shall be installed on an appropriate workstation computer running a

Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system. When installed and run, the application shall

display a Main Window and Login Window, where all configuration and operation

begins.

The login window shall consist of a User Name and Password field.

Configuration of the system shall include setup of:

Remote cameras and alarm names.

Users and Groups.

Data storage allocation.

Macro programming.

Scheduling, display and alarm notification.

Remote pre/post alarm recording.

Backup utility for setup configuration.

The software shall be provided on CD format in a suitable case.

1.8 Digital Video Recording and Network Workstation



Page 17 of 17

The Workstation shall be a state-of-the-art PC computer running Windows XP

Professional. It shall be fully equipped with the Digital Video Recording and Network

Software. The Workstation shall require an external monitor for operation.

The Workstation shall have an ATX platform motherboard and 300 watt power supply

using an Intel® 3.5 GHz processor. It shall have 6 GB of RAM memory, a 750 GB hard

drive, a 100 Mbps PCI-type LAN Card, a Video Display Adapter using an nVidia®

GeForce FX5200™ GPU with 2 GB of RAM memory and additional case fan cooling. The

Workstation shall be equipped with a PS-2 wheel mouse and 101-key keyboard. The

workstation shall be with latest specification existing in the market at the time of

installation.

The Workstation shall be housed in a mid-height tower case with all suitable connectors

available on the back panel. It shall be constructed of steel and plastic materials in a

beige-color exterior. It shall also be operated indoors in a temperature range not to

exceed 32 to 104° F (0 to 40° C) and a humidity range not to exceed 0 to 95% relative, in

a non-condensing atmosphere. The Workstation shall employ a Universal Voltage Power

Supply requiring 105 - 240 VAC @ 50 - 60 Hz.

Recorders shall be provided to store videos for a period of 30 days.

1.9 Control Console

Provide appropriate control console for CCTV ,Access Control System, etc. at the

Control room.

The custom build control desk shall have enough number of 19", 21" & 42" cubicles. Size

and type shall be as per the requirements of providing monitors and control equipment

for all the ELV system as specified and as shown on the related drawings. It shall be to

the approval of CLIENT.


VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 1 of 8

SECTION 17

VOICE / DATA SYSTEM


VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 2 of 8

SECTION 17

VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

3.0 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION

4.0 19” IDT / MDT / FO – CD CABINET

5.0 INSTALLATION

6.0 TESTING

7.0 DOCUMENTATION

8.0 WARRANTY


VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 3 of 8

1.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. The proposed solution must be the latest available technology for the structured

cabling system.

2. The contractor shall install complete end-to-end Class E(00) system solution as

detailed in the following sections.

3. The proposed solution of Class E(00) must be provided with a minimum of 15

years performance warranty for the full bandwidth.

4. Wherever the standards (EIA/TIA, Cenelec, ISO) are not ratified, the latest "Draft"

shall be referred.

5. All components pertaining to structured cabling system shall be manufactured

by the DOHMS approved manufacturers, IBM and components from other

manufacturers shall not be accepted.

6. Installation shall meet ETISALAT requirements. Contractor to obtain approval on

drawings from ETISALAT.

2.0 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

1. The voice panels installed in the IDT / MDT should have RJ45 interface and shall

be installed in industry standard 19" cabinet as indicated in the drawings.

2. Each area shall have its own IDT. The IDT shall constitute of RJ45 Patch Panel

housed in industry standard 19" cabinet ( 800 x 800).

3. The Multi-Pair cables shall be terminated on RJ45 termination panels (also housed

in the 19" cabinet), whereby individual pairs can be accessed.

4. The horizontal cables shall be terminated on Screened RJ45 Patch Panels on the

IDT end and the other end of the cables shall be terminated with single shielded

RJ45 or dual shielded RJ45 outlet based on the drawings.

5. The contractor shall also supply patch cords and line cords to complete the end-

to-end Class E(00) system.

6. The Data MDT (FO Campus Distributor) shall also be installed in industry standard

19" cabinet.

7. Fiber Optic cable constituting of 12 Core MM shall be installed between the IDF

for data backbone application, as indicated in the drawings.

8. The FO cables shall be field terminated with SC connectors in cabinet mounted

FO patch panels.


VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 4 of 8

9. At least one duplex SC-SC patch cords shall be supplied in each IDT, and equal

number in the Data MDT.

10. The main IT room or MDF room shall be called MTR (Main Telecom Room).

11. IDF rooms shall be called FTR (Floor Telecom Room).

3.0 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

Horizontal Cable:

The horizontal cable shall constitute of four (4) individually screened Twisted Pair (SSTP),

AWG23. The outer sheath shall be LSOH and the cable shall be specified up to 250MHz

or better and should have the following values or better for Attenuation and NEXT:

Frequency (MHz) Attenuation (dB) NEXT (dB)

1 2.0 90

4 3.6 88

10 5.7 85

16 7.2 84

20 8.1 83

31.2 10.2 82

62.5 14.7 81

100 18.9 79

155 24.0 78

200 27.0 78

250 31.4 77

• The horizontal cabling shall be star-wired.

• The maximum horizontal distance shall be 90Mtr. between the outlet and the

patch panel (excluding patch cords and line cords).

• The horizontal cabling shall be free of taps and bridges.

• One cable shall be strictly used for one application, cable sharing will not be

acceptable.

Connecting Hardware for Horizontal Cable:

Connecting hardware shall be based on shielded RJ45 interface. The hardware shall

feature excellent transmission performance and mechanical strength. Integral wire

management and cable strain relief shall be integrated into the hardware. It should be

possible to use the same RJ45 interface module at the outlet end as well as the patch

panel (IDT) end. Termination of the cables on the hardware shall be accomplished

without the use of any tools i.e. tools free installation. The termination at the patch panel

end should cater to grounding of the panels using separate earthing facilities. The

patch panels should consist of earthing kits to enable this grounding of shielded cabling.


VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 5 of 8

Wherever single RJ45 outlet is used, it should be possible to easily upgrade to dual RJ45,

without any major changes to the faceplate. The Screened RJ45 will have the following

specification:-

- Comply with the latest standard proposals of ISO/IEC and EIA/TIA for Cat 6

requirements.

- Compatible with Category 6 Generic standard plugs.

- Tool-free connection technique (IDC) for data cables with AWG 23-26 wire

diameter.

- Allows opto-mechanical control of the connection technique.

- Error-free connection according to EIA/TIA 568A/B/C without pair crossover.

- Patented shield contacting with integrated cable strain relief.

- Halogen-free material.

- SGS, UL, CSA certified.

Application:

- Draft IEC 60603-7-4: Unshielded 8-Way Connectors for Frequencies up to 250 MHz;

April 2000

- DRAFT ISO/IEC 11801 SECOND EDITIONS: ISO/IEC JTC 1/SC 25/WG3 N598S; 2000-

05-08

- Draft EN 50173 second editions: CLC TC 215 WG1S 2/20; April 2000

Flame retardance :

In accordance with UL 94 V0 Rating

Mechanical, Electrical and Transmission Data (measured at 20°C):

Mechanical Data

Material Polycarbonate, (UL 94 V-H)

Mating cycles > 750

Wire diameter 0,4 mm (AWG 26) – 0,57 mm (AWG 23)

Insulation diameter 0,8 – 1,6 mm

Wire strain relief Through labyrinth in IDC block

Cable strain relief Through cable ties

For shielded RJ45

Shield contacting Large surface contact springs (on plug)


VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 6 of 8

Shield contacting Shield lance (on cable)

Earthing terminals for flat plugs 4.8 x 0.5 mm

Shield material CuSn, tin-plated, 2 – 4 µm

Electric and Transmission Data

Contact resistance < 50 milli Ohm (conductor – conductor)

Contact resistance 1< 20 milli Ohm (shield – shield)

Insulation resistance > 500 mega Ohm (500 VDC)

Dielectric strength 1000 Veff, 50 Hz/1 min (conductor – conductor)

Dielectric strength 11500 Veff, 50 Hz/1 min (conductor – shield)

Coupling resistance IEC 96-1

1 MHz < 15 milliohm

10 MHz < 100 milliohm

RJ45 Hardware Electrical Characterization, Transmission performances:

Worst Pair Combination with a Cat.6 Plug

Patch Cords & Line Cords:

The patch cords and line cords shall constitute of two modular RJ45 plugs assembled on

shielded twisted pair stranded cable. The SSTP stranded cable shall be constructed using

flexible cable . The sum length of all patch cords & line cords for one outlet shall not

exceed 10Mtr. Under no circumstances shall locally assembled patch cords and line

cords will be acceptable, all must be factory made.

Connecting Hardware for Voice Backbone Cable:

The voice backbone cables shall be terminated on high density 50 port RJ45 patch

panels, which shall be housed in the 19" IDT cabinet. These panels shall accept UTP

cables having AWG22-26 solid or stranded wire. Highly visible, colour coded strips shall

be used to identify individual pair of the backbone cable. These panels shall have

features like gas-tight connection, integral strain relief mechanism.

Data Backbone Cable:

Frequency Attenuation NEXT FEXT RL

[MHz] [dB] [dB] [dB] [dB] [dB] [dB] [dB] [dB]

Limit Typ Limit Typ Limit Typ Limit Typ

0.02 <0.013 80.0 >96.84 75.0 >83.7 35.0 >45

4 0.04 <0.015 80.0 >85.25 71.05 >73.7 35.0 >45

10 0.06 <0.019 74.0 >77.25 63.1 >66.0 35.0 >43

20 0.09 <0.024 68.0 >71.36 57.1 >60.2 35.0 >38.5

31.25 0.11 <0.018 64.1 >67.82 53.2 >56.4 35.0 >36

62.5 0.16 <0.023 58.1 >61.63 47.2 >50.5 28.1 >30

100 0.20 <0.050 54.0 >58.76 43.1 >46.3 24.0 >27

125 0.22 <0.062 52.1 >58.55 41.2 >44.1 22.1 >25

155.52 0.25 <0.074 50.2 >57.77 39.3 >42.4 20.2 >23

175 0.26 <0.085 49.1 >56.12 38.2 >41.6 19.1 >22

200 0.28 <0.100 48.0 >50.10 37.1 >40.7 18.0 >21.5

250 0.32 <0.170 46.0 >48.39 35.1 >39.2 16.0 >19


VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 7 of 8

The backbone cable for data applications shall comprise of fiber optic cables. The

cables shall have minimum 8 or 12 cores of Multimode 50H/125H graded index fiber

strands. The fiber optic cables shall have the following characteristics:

Wavelength (nm) Max. Attenuation (dB) Bandwidth (MHz x

Km)

850 <2.5 >400

1300 <0.7 >1200

If the backbone distance exceeds 550Mtr, single mode fiber cables shall be installed.

These cables when installed, shall have the following characteristics:

Wavelength (nm) Max. Attenuation (dB) Bandwidth (GHz x

Km)

1300 0.4 100

1550 0.2 100

The fiber optic cable shall be tight buffered, indoor type, LSOH when used within the

building and outdoor type, rodent protected when used to connect between the

buildings.

The fiber optic cable shall be installed with a bending radius > 15 times the outer

diameter of the cable.

Connecting Hardware for Data Backbone Cable:

The fiber optic (data backbone) cable shall be field terminated with ST connectors (with

ceramic ferrule) on each fiber strand. These connectors shall be installed in fiber optic

patch panel, mounted in 19" IDT cabinet. These shall feature sliding drawer type panels

for better administration of the fiber cables. The panels shall have holes at the rear for

inserting and strain-relieving cables with PG glands. Cable and fiber guides for buffer

management within the panels shall be built-in the panel. The insertion loss on each SC

connectors shall be < 0.2dB.

Fiber Optic Patch Cords:

Fiber optic patch cords need to be provided to enable rapid connection and

disconnection repeatedly on a non-destructive basis. Fiber optic patch cords shall be

supplied with each IDT. The sum total quantity of IDTs shall be supplied at the data MDT

(SC-SC). The patch cords shall be Multimode Graded Index duplex 50H/125H with SC

connectors on one end and the other end will have connectors to suit the network

equipment (SC). Provide for Single mode patch cords, wherever necessary. The patch

cords shall have a mating cycle of 1000 and maximum tensile load on the cable of

100N. Under no circumstances shall locally assembled patch cords and line cords will be

acceptable, all must be factory made.

4.0 19" IDT/MDT/FO-CD CABINET

The cabinet shall provide a controlled environment to house telecommunications

equipment, connecting hardware and to terminate the entire horizontal cabling, voice


VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 8 of 8

backbone cabling and data backbone cabling. These cabinets shall be of high quality

and include locking doors. The cabinet shall be either wall mounted (with access from

back and front – Swing type frame) or freestanding (with wheels) depending on the size

of the cabinet. The wall mount cabinet should have a minimum depth of 500mm and

the freestanding cabinet shall have a minimum depth of 800mm. Provide sufficient

space in the cabinet for telecommunications/network equipment and future expansion.

At IDTs where data backbone is not installed, allow sufficient space in the cabinet for

installing data backbone in the future. Wherever data backbone is installed, the IDT

cabinet shall be supplied with Fan Tray and UK type powerstrip. These cabinets shall be

supplied with sufficient quantities of cable organisers for management/dressing of patch

cords.

5.0 INSTALLATION

1. The contractor shall not engage any sub-contractor to carry out the structured

cabling work.

2. The installation shall comply with the requirements of ISO-11801 Class E as

appropriate.

3. The structured cabling system (cables, RJ45 outlets, panels etc) shall be labeled

in accordance with EIA/TIA-606.

6.0 TESTING

1. The contractor shall test and demonstrate on site, to the satisfaction of the

engineer, that the wiring is in full compliance with specific requirements of a

Class E installation (250MHz). All the tests shall be carried out in accordance with

TSB-67 standard.

2. The contractor shall provide test results (both hard copy and soft copy) for every

data and every voice outlet.

7.0 DOCUMENTATION

1. The contractor shall submit a set of documentation comprising of layouts

showing cable route & position of all outlets, labeling scheme, layout of cabinets

and test results.

8.0 WARRANTY

1. The OEM through the specialist contractor shall provide 15 years component and

system performance warranty.


CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM

Page 1 of 8

SECTION 18




Page 2 of 8

SECTION 18


INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3.0 BATTERIES

4.0 CENTRAL MONITORING DEVICE

5.0 EXIT AND SAFETY LUMINAIRE

6.0 HIGH FREQUENCY ELECTRONIC CONTROLGEAR

7.0 MAIN BATTERY PANEL AND SUBSTATION PANELS

8.0 AUTOMATIC MONITORING AND LOGGING FACILITY

9.0 BMS INTERFACE

10.0 WIRING



Page 3 of 8

1.0 GENERAL

The emergency lighting system & all its components shall be designed & installed to

meet the local civil defense requirements & the respective DIN/VDE 0108 & BS5266

standards applicable to this project.

Emergency lighting shall fulfill the following functions,

Illuminate the escape routes

Indicate the escape route direction clearly

Provide the Exit signs on all the Exits

Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment & other life saving equipment on the

premises are properly illuminated.

Permit operations concerned with safety measures & to shut down hazardous processes.

All products used in the emergency lighting system shall be manufactured by an ISO9001

certified company, complying with the relevant VDE/DIN/BS/EN standards & shall bear

the CE certification for Electro-Magnetic compatibility.

The number of central battery panels shall be appropriately decided for maximum

reliability to ensure continued emergency supply & on large buildings failure of one

panel shall not result in total emergency lighting supply failure for the entire building.

2.0 Central Battery System Description

2.1 Mechanical Construction

The battery housing shall be sheet steel, powder coated housing IP32 with removable

screwed front, rear & top doors to provide complete access to the batteries. The

electronics section shall have IP54 sheet steel enclosure with transparent polycarbonate

window for all central systems & IP54 sheet steel enclosure with full metal door for all

substations.

The electronic compartment shall have large cabling compartments with cable entries

from top via four or more undrilled removable metal flange plates. All incoming cables &

looping circuits shall be connected on protected & fused terminals as per ENVDE0100. All

outgoing luminaire circuits shall be connected direct to relevant components via plug-in

type terminals 2.5 sq. mm. The electronic components shall have 19” slide in technology

for installation and maintenance.

2.2 Electrical Construction

The system shall be built up in a modular format with all modules being plug-in-type

design. The outgoing circuits shall be fed through changeover modules. One module

shall be used for each separate switchable outgoing circuits with maximum load of

6Amps as per DIN/VDE 0108, if circuits are 2 Amps & below, one module with two

separately switchable outgoing circuits shall be used . Each circuit shall be protected

within the system on mains & battery side via screw-in type cartridge fuses on each

module. The fuses shall be accessible via front plate of the module. The mains supply &

battery mains cables shall be protected by knife edge fuses. The fuse holders shall have

handles for simple removal of the fuses.



Page 4 of 8

Each panel shall have a spare fuse carrier with atleast three spare fuses for each size

used in respective panel.

2.3 Control Module

The control module shall be fully encapsulated plug-in type, composed of a

microprocessor control module with plain text display with multiple line display of

operative states & luminaire failures.

LED,s shall indicate,

- Mains operation

- Mains failure

- Battery operation

- Summation fault

Potential free indicator contacts for,

- Operation

- Battery operation

- Summation fault

Centronic interface for the connection of standard printers shall be provided on the

front of the control module

A electronically controlled 24V output for the voltage monitoring of lighting sub

distribution panels shall be provided.

Electronically isolated mains monitoring for maintained & non maintained light circuits

with forced changeover in case of mains failure from mains to emergency light

operation.

As a standard following programming modes shall be available,

- Manual reset

- Time delay of mains return

- Stair well light timer adjustable from 1 to 15 minutes

- Acoustic alarm in case of mains failure, manual reset or summation fault

Individual changeover per emergency circuit with free programming for maintained or

non maintained light & two pole fusing confronting to VDE.

Failure recognition for each individual safety / Exit luminaire in conjunction with

proprietary electronic ballasts including 2 wire monitoring module without additional

data line.



Page 5 of 8

2.4 Changeover Module

Each changeover module shall be fully encapsulated plug-in type, freely programmable

to suit type of luminaires connected on outgoing circuits i.e. maintained, non

maintained or switch maintained. The individual lamp monitoring circuits shall be

included in the changeover module. Each changeover module shall have LED

indications for Circuit On & Lamp failure & shall be fit to monitor upto 12 luminaires

maximum as required by DIN/VDE0108/pr EN50171. All outgoing circuit terminals shall be

provided to monitor the sub distribution boards.

2.5 Maintained Light Switch Sensing Module

For mains operation common switching of general lighting & safety lighting by means of

existing light switches a compact fully encapsulated module shall be provided near

each luminaire circuit to be switched with each of these reflecting one lighting switch.

These modules shall also serve as a sub circuit monitoring module, whereby end circuits

are monitored for any power failure in that area.

2.6 Circuit Monitoring Module

Each lighting DB or rack feeding light circuits in all areas shall be provided with voltage

monitoring modules for mains failure so that supply voltage can be automatically

transferred from normal to battery supply mode. In corridors, lift lobbies and entrances,

the respective lighting circuits shall be provided with sub-circuit monitoring modules for

detection of the particular circuit and automatically switching-on the emergency lights

in that area.

2.7 Charger

Charger module shall be fully encapsulated plug-in type, micro processor controlled

module with temperature controlled voltage charging to IU characteristics. Automatic

boost charging facility shall be built in to the system depending on the required total

battery capacity. It shall have charging & supervising method for failure indication of

battery circuits as well as battery charger. The charger shall be designed for a 90%

recharge of a fully discharged battery set within 20 hours.

It shall come complete with earth leakage monitor for battery circuit monitoring. It shall

be provided with LED indications for,

- Operation

- Charger On

- Booster On

- Mains Operation

- Battery capacity > 10%, >50%, 100%

- Charging Failure

- Insulation fault

It shall have potential free indicator contacts for,



Page 6 of 8

- Charging failure

- Fast charge

- Insulation fault

It shall have a push button to simulate earth leakage failures.

It shall include plug-in-type terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains & battery

accessible via the front plate of the charger

3.0 Batteries

Batteries shall be maintenance free, sealed leak proof 220V lead acid gas

recombination type battery with following system features,

- Life time expectation > 10 years @ 24ºC ambient – temperature as per DIN VDE

0558, Part 508.

- extremely low gas generation, requiring no special ventilation

- acid density between 1.24kg/L & 1.26kg / L

- service life of ten years

- low self discharge

- IP 32 battery cabinet with ventilation openings and IP 54 electronic cabinet.

- maintenance free special connectors with pole covers meeting the rules of

prevention of the accidents

- pole ducts tight to electrolyte & atmospheric oxygen

- absolutely maintenance free over the whole service life

- Immobilized electrolyte design

- permanently sealed pressure release safety vent

- Operates at extremely low internal pressure

4.0 Central Monitoring

The Central monitoring shall be through BMS and the BMS PC.

It shall have programming / automatic testing facility for time duration test, luminaire

display function test, location of luminaire, manual reset & acoustic alarm

5.0 EXIT & Safety luminaire

Unless otherwise stated all EXIT luminaires shall be operated via an EMERGENCY CENTRAL

BATTERY SYSTEM (ECBS).



Page 7 of 8

All Exit luminaires shall have pictogram legends as per DIN 4844/CEN TC 169 or markings

as per local civil defence requirements with viewing distance of 36 meters or 16 meters

based on the length of the corridor. The luminaire shall be built according to EN 60598.

Safety luminaires shall be operated by an EMERGENCY CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM. This

shall be achieved by using high frequency electronic ballasts operating at full load or by

the use of halogen lamp luminaires. These ballast shall be fitted on the part of normal

lighting designated as emergency lighting.

All Exit and safety luminaires shall have a monitoring component with easy accessible

addressing module. All luminaires with high frequency ballasts shall have a built in or

separate monitoring facility. Outside of every installed exit and safety luminaire a label

(Red/White) with the circuit and luminaire reference number shall be installed.

5.1 Slave Emergency Luminaire (Suitable for connection across central battery system)

All luminaries shall meet following requirements :

Supply voltage 220V/230V AC/DC

The luminaire shall comply the requirements of EN60598

Electronic ballast shall comply the requirements of EN60298/60294

EMC or EMI protection to EN55015

Ambient Temperature - 40ºC.

5.1.1 Type – EL – 1 (Areas without False Ceiling)

Luminaire shall be non maintained type slave luminaire with 8 watt fluorescent lamp with

addressable low loss electronic ballast which can communicate with central control

module. Luminaire housing shall be white plastic. Luminaire shall be wall / ceiling /

pendant mounted to suit site conditions.

Protection class I, IP 65

5.1.2 Type – EL – 2 (False Ceiling areas)

1 x 8W fully recessed Emergency luminaire. Housing shall be sheet steel white with

electronic ballast and communication module.

5.2 Slave Exit luminaire (suitable for connection across central battery system)

5.2.1 Type – Exit – 1 (Areas without False Ceiling)

Maintained 8w luminaire, wall / ceiling / pendant mounted with addressable low loss

electronic ballast which can communicate with the panel.

Protection : IP-65

Minimum viewing distance 30 meters

The diffuser shall have EXIT Legend with running man and directional arrow on one or

both sides as required at the location of installation. Housing shall be white plastic and

diffuser.

5.2.2 Type – Exit – 2 (Areas with False Ceiling)



Page 8 of 8

Exit light type shall be exclusive edge light with acrylic glass panel. The housing shall be

slim aluminium housing with snap on facility panels. It shall have 8W fluorescent lamp

and addressable electronic ballast

6.0 High Frequency Electronic Control Gear

All safety and exit luminaires shall be built according to EN 60598; electronic ballast to EN

60298/60294 and EN 60924/60925, EMC protection to EN 55015. The electronic ballast

with monitoring facility and easy accessible address module shall have an automatic

cut-out fuse for failures within the lamp circuit.

7.0 Main Central Battery Panel & Sub Station Panels

The substations shall be installed in areas with a maximum room temperature of 30

deg.C. The substations shall be located based on the requirements of the lighting loads

and optimising the field wiring. All substations shall be connected to the central station

for central group monitoring.

8.0 Automatic & Cyclic Function Monitoring & Logging Facility

An automatic monitoring and testing facility shall be installed with permanent cyclic

charger and battery monitor at intervals of five minutes or less with daily/weekly function

test of the complete load supplied from the battery, charger, wiring, luminaires, registration

and logging of tests and results. A manually operated test feature shall also be provided in

addition to the automatically operated testing feature.

9.0 BMS Interface

The CBS shall be integrated on LON works Protocol to BMS. Refer BMS specification for

the details regarding integration. The proposed system shall provide full integration

including luminaire status after each test. Display shall be available on BMS workstation.

Systems which cannot comply with the above will not be acceptable. The Central

Battery system Vendor shall provide LON interface module for data transfer to BMS.

10.0 Wiring

Wiring, both power and control, between the central battery, substation panels and

luminaires shall be carried out in fire retardant Pirelli FP200 or equivalent cable of suitable

size as per the local civil defence requirements.

3 core fire resistant cables with earth wire shall be provided to feed substations from

central battery panel. Cable size selection details shall be submitted based on the

electrical load of each substation.

Emergency lights in each staircase shall be wired in separate circuits to comply with Civil

Defence requirements.


NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 1 of 10

SECTION 19

NURSE CALL SYSTEM


NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 2 of 10

SECTION 19

NURSE CALL SYSTEM

INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 SYSTEM

3.0 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT INTERFACING

4.0 SAFETY

5.0 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE


NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 3 of 10

1.0 GENERAL

Computerized Nurse Call Systems shall be manufactured to fulfill the present valid

standards and regulations for light signaling technology (ALT) DIN 41050 (part 1 and 2),

HTM 2015 (BS & EN Standards).

For the installations of light signaling, the regulations DIN VDE 0834 and the standards

that are quoted shall be observed. Furthermore the standards DIN 41050 part 1 and 2 as

well as HTM 2015 shall be taken into consideration during the planning.

The systems shall incorporate the latest technology and shall be manufactured in an ISO

9001 environment.


2.1 Male and Female Wards

The computerized systems shall incorporate logic circuits to enable room data and time

information to be processed. With the nurse call systems it shall be possible to handle up

to 64 zones, which can be each divided into 6 logical sub-zones. This division shall be

achieved by software.

The maximum number of all logical and physical zones shall be limited to 240. For each

physical zone up to maximum of 50 patient rooms shall only be allowed. Furthermore the

system allows flexibility to adapt the allocation of room numbers according to individual

needs.

System characteristics

The nurse call system shall be designed for quick and easy installation. The software shall

allow individual flexibility, adapting to any changes in the application. For example

patient room numbers shall be quickly changed and allocated during or after

installation.

Call and presences shall be displayed at the operating station, in corridors, in duty rooms

and patient rooms. With the speech option, the call shall be answered from any one of

this points.

Operating the presence push button shall result in: cancellation of the call within the

room, activation of the call transfer and preparation of an emergency call. Existing calls

from other rooms shall be transferred to this room.

Systems with a speech facility shall allow communication from room to room or between

duty room and the patient. Speech facility shall be available from every bed. The

computerized nurse call system shall be operated in a centralized, decentralized or

combined mode, according to the requirements.

The system shall use a single six cores cable for power supply, speech and data lines.

System structure

The computerized nurse call system shall consist of 3 components:


NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 4 of 10

The operating computer (PC),

The nurse call control unit (NCS),

The room equipment with individual hand set consisting of Nurse call & speech function

at every bed.

The operating computer and the nurse call control units shall be independently

functional.

Operating Computer

The operating computer shall be used as a display unit for the information of the nurse

call control unit (NCS).

When used with a communication unit and in connection with a speech facility, the

operating computer shall enable general address calls and direct calls to rooms and

beds to take place. Calls on the system and staff presences shall be displayed in tabular

form.

Data specific to each patient shall be entered into an internal data memory. These data

shall be displayed on the screen of the operating computer whenever that patient calls.

Nurse Call Control Unit (NCS)

The nurse call control unit shall be the main control unit. It shall be built as a multi-

processor unit and shall comprise of a microprocessor, and audio adapter card and a

communication processor unit. Additional control cards shall be added according to

requirements.

The control programs and configuration data of the nurse call system shall be loaded via

the operating computer.

Room equipment

Information on the nurse call systems shall be received in rooms using different types of

system units. For example room terminals with displays shall show calls in order of priority.

Remind calls and presences shall be displayed continuously if there are no normal,

emergency or enhanced calls.

The connection board for room terminals and the electronic module shall be used as a

room distribution point and shall allow easy wiring to patient call equipment.

It shall be possible to substitute operating equipment without speech facility. For

example call push buttons or pear and multiple push buttons. In the case of nurse call

systems with speech, facility communication handsets shall be possible to be installed.

These handsets in addition to the call functions shall allow the control of radio and

lighting and provide a means of private two-way conversation. Units shall be capable of

providing integrated telephone functions.

The nurse stations and duty rooms shall be equipped with master stations. These shall

provide a means to set a presence indication as well as allowing zone linking. In addition

the systems shall provide speech facility, general address calls and direct speech to

beds or rooms as appropriate.


NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 5 of 10

In corridors, calls shall be indicated in clear text on information displays or outside the

room by the corridor lamp. Following types of calls shall be indicated:

Type of call As per

DIN 41050, Part 1

Visual signals

- Patient calls

normal call

bathroom/WC call

enhanced

bathroom/WC call

nurse call (abbr.: call)

bathroom or WC call

enhanced call

permanent light - red -

permanent light -

white

flashing light - white -

- Staff calls:

emergency call

doctor call

bathroom/WC

emergency call

nurse call with

emergency call

doctor call

(no statement)

flashing light - red -

permanent light -

green -

flashing light - white -, -

red - green

flashing light - white -

permanent light -

green -

- Further calls:

diagnostic call

remind call

diagnostic call

enhanced call

in memory switching



(slow blinking rhythm)

Also, refer to hospital specialist room data sheet for actual requirement. In addition to

the visual signals, acoustic signals shall also be sent to all rooms where presences are set.

The nurse call system shall distinguish between two call categories. Normal and

bathroom/WC calls shall belong to category 1. Doctor, emergency, diagnostic and

priority calls as well as enhanced bathroom/WC calls and bathroom/WC emergency

calls shall belong to category 2.

In the case of acoustic call transfer, calls of categories 1 and 2, as well as doctor and

telephone calls, shall be identified by different call intervals.

2.2 TRIAGE, RESUSCITATION, ACUTE TREATMENT, SHORT STAY WARDS, ICU, RECOVERY & ALL

TYPE OF OPERATION THEATRES

The nurse call system for these wards shall be able to handle up to 16 physical zones

(Zone controllers / Main control units), which can be each subdivided into 3 logical

groups.

The system shall be able to control up to 127 patient rooms via a corridor data-bus for

each zone controller (main control unit).

Call and presences shall be displayed in the duty room. By activating a presence push

button, the call from the concerned room shall be cancelled, the call transfer shall be


NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 6 of 10

activated and the emergency call shall be prepared. The system shall have the follow

me facility. (Calls from other rooms should be forwarded and audibly indicated to rooms

where presence is set.

The system shall be flexible to adapt the room numbers and the call names according to

the hospital needs and recommendations. In corridors, calls shall be visually indicated by

corridor lamps and information displays that can be wall or ceiling mounted.

E Following type of calls shall be indicated:

Call Type Optical signals

Patient calls

Normal call Permanent red light

Bathroom/WC call Permanent white light

Enhanced bathroom/WC

call

Flashing White light

Staff calls

Emergency call Flashing red light and

permanent green light

Bathroom emergency call Flashing white light and

permanent green light

Doctor call Sequential flashing white,

red then green light s

Other call types

Remind call Flashing red light (slow

blinking)

Diagnostic call Flashing red light

Nurse Station:

E The nurse station shall have the following functions:

- Call and status identification with following indicators: patient room, bed,

normal call, bathroom/WC call, emergency call, bathroom/WC

emergency call, doctor call, answered call in remind function, presence,

fault, following calls.

- Call activation (call button).

- Cancel and presence button.

- Call reminder.

- Free selection of zone linking from a special module.

- Simultaneous display of several calls and presence’s.

- Can be upgraded to have speech and public addressing with no major

changing in the system wiring.

Patient handset (multiple push button) functions:

- Nurse call release


NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 7 of 10

- Auto-release unbreakable plug system with 2 m cord length.

- Automatic call release as a plug call when plug ejected from the auto release

plug system

- Easily repaired and changed if required.

- 2 light control buttons.

General Equipment:

E The system shall include at least but not only the following main equipment which

can be upgraded at any time without any major changes:

E

1. Main control unit (Zone controller).

2. Data bus terminator unit.

3. System cabling.

4. Power supply (24 V - DC).

5. Electrical safety components.

E Scope of work:

1. The main control unit shall support the following:

E All types of patient and staff call including: normal call, bathroom/WC

call, priority call, enhanced bathroom call, emergency call, doctor call

and bathroom emergency call.

E Different optical signals for each type of call (different colours and colour

sequences).

E Different audio signals for all type of calls (different frequencies).

E Can be upgraded to support interface with the following:

- Computer.

- Printer.

- Paging system.

2. The system cabling shall be 4 twisted pairs telephone cable in addition to

one pair 1.5 – 2 mm2 for power distribution in the corridor data bus.

3. The power supply of the system shall be 24V self-regulated.

4. Safety features like emergency mode and short circuit protection shall be

built-in the system.


NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 8 of 10

Ward (Nurse station) equipment:

E The following equipment shall be available in the Nurse Station:

1. LCD alphanumeric display (Display module unit) for displaying all ward

information.

2. LCD alphanumeric display (Duty Selection Unit) for selection a predefined

link between wards.

3. A reminder button for changing the normal call into a reminded call (with

muted sound) for a certain predefined period of time.

4. A bus connection socket can be added to the station to enable an easy

upgrade to a master station unit with a power saving LCD touch screen

and speech facility.

5. It shall be possible to upgrade the system to have LED dot information

display in the corridor to display all calls information without any

modification in the system (only the cable connection to the display).

6. All active components shall be checked for functionality via the main

control unit automatically every 30 seconds.

Speech components may be added to the system at the nurse station when

required to upgrade with no additional major modifications in the system.

Room equipment:

E The following equipment shall be available in the patient rooms

Cancel and presence button:

Equipped with a button, LED reassurance lamp and a buzzer. It shall be used to cancel the

call and set presence of the nurse in the room. It shall be installed at the door entrance.

When the nurse is present in the room, the buzzer shall indicate if there is any calls and their

type from any other room in the ward.

Nurse call module with socket:

It shall be used for Normal call and Emergency call (when nurse is present). It shall be

installed beside the bed or in the bed head unit. The socket shall be used to connect a

multiple push button for the patient. This unit shall be active component unit having its

own logical address.

1. The over door light shall have a plastic base light grey RAL 7040, with white lamp

cover having 3 sections with different colour lamps (white, red and green) to


NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 9 of 10

identify the type of call / presence in the room. Patient hand sets with big red

button having the nurse sign to enable the easy use as well as an unbreakable

self-release plug system. There also shall be a reassurance LED behind the button

to indicate if there is a generated call.

2. All active components shall be checked for functionality via the main control unit

automatically every 30 seconds.

Pull cord (in the bathrooms):

Splash proof with 2 m long red cord having a big red end with the nurse sign to enable

the easy identification.

Individual cancel button:

This shall be used to cancel the bathroom calls independent from the main

cancel/presence button in the room.

Doctors/ Cardiac Call

This is a special button for calling the Doctors. This call shall be used for emergencies.

Over door light (Electronic module for patient rooms):

The electronic module shall be the central control unit for the patient room. At the same

time the electronic module shall be used as a corridor lamp. As active units, a display

module, a speech module and up to eight call modules shall be connected via the bed

data-bus. The active units shall be addressed with an eight-digit alphanumeric text. All

electronic modules shall be equipped with call and cancel circuits for passive circuits.

The over door light shall have a plastic base light grey RAL 7040 surface mounted, with

white lamp cover having 3 sections with different colour lamps (white, red and green) to

identify the type of call / presence in the room. This unit shall be active component unit

having its own logical address.

3.0 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT INTERFACING

The nurse call systems shall be extended by adding equipment via the interface. For

example, it shall be possible to connect the paging system to the nurse call system.

Furthermore it is possible to connect internal messages, such as fire alarms or technical

alarms via interface units.

4.0 SAFETY

The nurse call system shall be self-monitoring. Any malfunctions shall be selectively shown

on each display terminal. In the case of a total failure of the nurse call control unit (PRZ)

the system shall operate in an emergency mode and provide call functions, call cancel,

presence indication and call transfer to rooms where presence has been set, in addition

to the visual indication of the corridor and zone lamps. In case of power failure, calls shall

remain stored until the power supply is connected again.

An auto-release plug mounted onto a pear or multiple push buttons as well as on the

patient terminal or patient handset shall allow a safe disconnection and thus avoid

damage to the plug and socket units found in conventional arrangements. When a plug

is inadvertently removed a "plug out" message shall be shown on the display units. Lamp

outputs shall also be short circuit protected.

Electrical safety and EMC requirements shall conform to appropriate EC directives.


NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 10 of 10

5.0 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

The equipment shall be durable. Room equipment such as the room terminal and the

electronic modules shall be possible to be replaced at any time, simply by plugging and

unplugging, without interrupting the operation of the system.

A diagnostic function shall allow the display of information regarding the actual

operational condition of the system on screen of the operating computer.

It shall be possible to connect a modem to the operating computer enabling remote

diagnostics and the update of new systems software. This shall allow capability to

diagnostic problems and enable software improvements.


CENTRAL CLOCK SYSTEM

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 20




Page 2 of 4

SECTION 20


INDEX

1.0 GENERAL



Page 3 of 4

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall allow for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of a

Central clock system comprising of Time Control Center, TCXO modules chime modules,

secondary clocks, power supply units and all necessary cabling and termination. The

system shall be generally as indicated on the drawings and as herein specified, to the

approval of the Engineer.

The equipment shall be UL standard 863 and must be CSA certified.

The contractor shall submit the material submittal strictly based on each and every

clauses of the specification for strict quality assurance and performance of the system.

Alternative proposal will not be accepted in whatsoever the reason, unless the

alternative manufacturer comply the specification requirements of the system.

Compliance statement shall be submitted with supporting design calculation and

product literature and schematic diagrams for engineers approval.

The equipment shall meet the following requirements.

1.1 Time Control Center

The time control center shall provide accurate time keeping for control of secondary

clocks such as Celestra, BCD data clocks, synchronous wire, power line carrier, and a

minute impulse clocks .

The Time control center shall have a programmable time and day of week referenced

control of six output circuits.

A liquid crystal display shows the time, day of week, and the status of the six output

circuits. The display is also used for programming, editing and reviewing of stored

programs.

The state of the six output circuits is programmed by the user through a keypad or may

also be controlled by six manual override switches. The user may program from one

to four independent schedules within the Time Control Center. Changing between

schedules is accomplished from the keyboard and may be done at any time.

The display in its run mode shall indicate the time, day of week, circuit status, and what

schedules have been selected. When the programming mode has been entered the

display shall lead programming sequence by flashing what is to be selected. Responses

to prompts are entered via the keyboard using either the “Yes” or “No” keys.

The control switches shall have 3 position (on/auto/off) maintained switches. Manual

“on/off” control shall override the programmed functions. The ”Auto” position provides

programmed functions to occur.

Complete manual control of secondary clocks shall be provided via Man/Auto/Off

switches for synchronous wired and power line carrier systems with generator start.

The Time Control center shall meet/have the following operational and functional

requirements.



Page 4 of 4

a. Microprocessor based controller

b. Controls synchronous Wired

c. RS-232 interface for synchronization to WWV

d. 6 local program control circuits

e. 7day programming (seconds resolution)

f. Automatic daylight saving time correction

g. Manual override switches

h. Interactive Programming

i. Liquid crystal display (6 digits)

j. All programmed times available to all circuits and schedules

k. 4 program schedules

l. 1000 program events

m. AC line synchronous or DC Quartz time base

n. 19” rack mountable

o. Impulse clock control

p. Coded Receiver Interface

q. Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator - (TCXO)

r. Must comply with UL standard 863

1.2 Programming Keypad

The 12 segment shall be used to input all programming including setting of the time and

date, daylight saving time changes, schedules changes, and selection of 12 or 24 hour

display format. It shall be possible to secure the keyboard by an access code which shall

prevent tampering or unauthorized program modifications.

Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator

The Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator (TCXO) shall be used to stabilize the

power line frequency. The temperature compensated crystal module shall provide a

source of frequency reference to the central controller. This module shall provide

accuracy of + 3 seconds per month from 32 degree F to 122 degree F.

1.3 Receptacle Assembly

The receptacle assembly shall be used to connect surface mounted clocks equipped

with four position connectors. It shall be mounted on a stainless steel single gang plate

that measures 2-3/4” wide by 4-1/4” high.

1.4 Analog Clock Assemblies

Standard Features:

400mm dia analog clock

Anodized aluminum housing

Black numbers on white background

Single or double sizes, wall or ceiling mounting bracket

24V polarized 1/1 with pulses from master clock

Protection IP44

DESCRIPTION

The analog clocks provided shall have high visibility under a variety of ambient light

conditions. The clock shall be round shape of 400mm diameter. Clocks shall also be

connected to power line carrier/synchronous timing inputs that provide hourly and 12

hour corrections. A capacitor in each clock maintains timekeeping for approximately 12

hours in the event of power failure in the facility.


PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND

MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 1 of 9

SECTION 21

PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM



MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 2 of 9

SECTION 21

PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM

INDEX

1.0 GENERAL



MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 3 of 9

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall allow for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of a

Public Address system comprising of Amplifiers, Audio matrix units, loudspeakers, FM/AM

tuner, Twin Cassette deck, CD player, Digital Voice Announcer, Multi-zone paging

microphone and all necessary cabling and termination. The system shall be generally as

indicated on the drawings and as herein specified, to the approval of the Engineer.

The complete system shall be supplied by a specialist Subcontractor having at least 5

years experience in the field. All equipment supplied shall be from reputed

manufacturers and shall be installed by the authorized representative of the

manufacturer.

In general, the main system shall allow making vocal announcements from different

microphones as shown in the layout drawing, playing recorded message

announcements and playing background music via a twin tape deck, a multi disc CD

player and one AM/FM tuner. Selection of music for the public areas shall be from the

amplifier rack itself.

The system control console shall be located in the Security Office. It shall be possible to

make announcement from any paging microphone to the corresponding areas or to

any other zones required at the site. Audio matrix shall be used with appropriate wall

mounted selector push buttons provided near to each microphones.

It shall be possible to select any or all zones for paging from the microphones. The

recorded message module shall be initiated manually by push buttons or automatically

by potential free contacts from the Fire Alarm control panel.

System shall be configured in such a way that when a paging to the area where local

audio/visual system is introduced, paging from main system shall override local

programme being conducted.

For paging purposes the entire area shall be divided into 16 zones. Volt-free contacts

corresponding to alarm conditions of each zone and roof shall be made available at

the amplifier rack by the Fire Alarm system supplier.

The digital storage module shall be capable of storing three different messages, ‘Alert,

Evacuate and All Clear’ each of at least 18 seconds duration. It shall be possible to

manually override an automatic announcement.

Output of Audio matrix to the corresponding zone shall be through dedicated amplifiers

for each zone. Common amplifiers for different zones will not be acceptable. Modular

amplifiers as specified with all plugg-in input modules shall be provided for Central

reception and integrated amplifier for other zones.

The system shall be provided with 22 zones minimum to programme each zone as per

the requirement of the user.

1.1 Amplifier Rack



MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 4 of 9

The amplifiers and associated equipment shall be housed in a standard 19” rack with

glass door. Ventilation panels shall be provided for proper air circulation and cooling.

1.2 Modular Amplifier Mainframe

The amplifier shall be modular construction with preamplifiers pluggable onto a

mainframe. Upto six preamplifiers could be added as required providing microphone

input module, lineinput module, alarm tones, digital voice module, Chime module etc.

Amplifiers with built in music sources input and mic input will not be accepted.

Control over the total mainframe shall be achieved through audio monitoring

combiners. The motherboard shall also be capable of accepting switch selectable pre-

announcement chimes.

The power rating of the amplifiers shall be 75W, 150 watts or 300 watts depending on the

loudspeaker load requirements. No amplifier shall be loaded more than 80% of its rated

capacity. Slave amplifiers shall be used to meet additional power requirements.

The amplifiers shall have the following technical characteristics.

Output power Nominal RMS : 120 W or 250W

Maximum RMS(100V) : 135W or 300W

Output Voltage : 100V

Output Regulation : 1.25dB/1.5 dB

100Vline, 3 dB down

Frequency Response : 60 Hz-20,000Hz

Total harmonic distortion : <0.4%

Output noise : >85dB

Sensitivity : 0dBm, 775mVolts

AC Input : 220V,50Hz

Operational temperature : -20 to 45 deg C

1.3 Microphone input Module

The module shall be a basic general purpose low impedance balanced microphone

input, with a selectable phantom power facility. In addition it can be configured to

process ambient noise sensor signals when used in conjunction with level regulating

combiner.

It shall have the following specifications:

Sensitivity : 200uV maximum.

Input impedance : 350 Ohms @ 1kHz. Suitable for upto

200 Ohms microphone impedance.

Frequency response : 30Hz and 18kHz 150 Ohms source

Signal/noise ratio : 55dB max. sensitivity, 150 Ohms source

Distortion : 0.1% at nominal output 1kHz, max. sensitivity

1.4 Balanced line input module



MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 5 of 9

The balanced line input module shall be a general purpose balanced 600 Ohminput,

with a selectable phantom power facility for use with microphones having built-in pre-

amplification. It can also be configured for inputs from 100V line source by switch

selection.

It shall have the following specifications:

Sensitivity : 150mV maximum, 100V minimum by internal

switch selection

Input impedance : 15k Ohms (300mV),100k Ohms (100V).

Frequency response : 30Hz to 20kHz

Signal/noise ratio : 65dB max. sensitivity, input terminated

Distortion : 0.1% at nominal output 1kHz, max. sensitivity

1.5 FM/AM Tuner

The tuner shall be a modular Quartz-PLL synthesizer tuner with random presets for 30

FM/AM stations. It shall have a 4 letter station name memory and all 30 preset stations

are automatically sampled in sequence for the user to decide a station to listen to.

The tuner shall be connected to the system using balanced line input specified

elsewhere in the specification. The tune shall be Pioneer or equal.

Tuning Range : AM - 530-1700kHz

VHF/FM - 87.5-108 Mhz

Sensitivity : 31.2dBf (1.3uV, 75Ohms)

Frequency response : 30Hz –15,000Hz +/- 1 dB

Signal to Noise Ratio : (IHF) Mono/Stereo

76dB/73dB (at 85dBf)

T.H. Distortion : 0.3%

Stereo Separation : 40 dB @ 1kHz.

Power Consumption : 10W

1.6 Digital Voice Announcer Module

The Audio Message Storage module shall be pluggable onto the mainframe and shall

provide on site recording from microphone or tape for verbal warning, informative

messages or a combination of the two allowing system operators to record and re-

record their own messages independently.

Once recorded, the messages may be played back any number of times without

degradation of the audio quality.

The Solid State Audio Message Storage module shall be fitted in the amplifier mainframe

front panel. The design uses digital audio conversion and storage of high quality audio

announcements, each of up to 36 seconds in length.

It shall be designed with internal battery backup facilities to ensure that the message

data is retained when the power to the amplifier mainframe is removed. It shall also

provide internally selectable message override functions. These enable alarm messages

to be triggered remotely by external control line like from fire detection system.



MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 6 of 9

The maximum number of messages can be stored in each module shall be 2. 2 Nos. such

modules shall be included in the system for 3 messages. It shall have the following front

panel controls: Rec/Play, Record/Preview, Step sequence (1-8) and shall have an audio

bandwidth of 100Hz to 5.5kHz.

On playback, external control lines(dry contacts from Fire Alarm Panel) enable messages

to be triggered individually or in sequence by external equipment.

1.7 Integrated Amplifier

The amplifier shall be rated 60W or 120 W suitable to drive the loudspeakers and shall

have a 20% spare capacity. It shall be a full feature integrated amplifier with four

universal inputs, front panel activity indicators and shall be rack mountable. It shall be

possible to add slave amplifiers for additional power requirements.

The amplifier shall have the following characteristics.

Input : 220/240V, 50Hz

Output regulation : <2dB

Distortion : <0.1%

Frequency response : 60Hz-18kHz

Power rating : 60W or 120W

The amplifiers shall support following basic requirement:

Universal prioritized inputs

Two note chime facility

Music/Speech and speech only 100V/8Ohm output

Phantom Power

Alarm tone generator

VOX and dual supply operation

1.8 Audio Matrix Mixer

The matrix mixer shall be used to connect all the microphone and music sources inputs

and to route the required input to a particular output. It shall provide 16 line level inputs

and up to 16 line level outputs. All input and output connectors shall be Phoenix type

connectors. Each 110 cross-point shall provide full user control of parameters including

level, ramp time, and slew rate. Ramping and ducking of cross-point levels shall be

under user control. All inputs shall be independently routable to any or all outputs. The

gain adjustment of level at each cross-point shall be from 0dB to -100dB. The matrix shall

be programmable through an RS232 port.

The matrix shall be capable of routing paging inputs while automatically ducking

background sources. The matrix shall be controllable through an external ReO device

bus. The ReO bus shall be a synchronous 485 protocol capable of supporting up to 128

remotes in a system. Remotes shall be group-able into logical stations. ReO remote

devices shall be both push-button and rotary knob devices capable of selecting audio

sources and controlling audio volume levels. Outputs shall be groupable into logical

zones. The matrix shall be operable either as a stand-alone device or in conjunction with

computer control through an RS232 interface. The matrix shall be provided with a

standard Windows® graphical user interface for setup and control.



MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 7 of 9

There shall be available an sixteen channel optional mic/line card to provide pre-

amplification of input signals. This card shall provide four ranges of gain from 0dB to

+60dB. The gain range shall be automatically or manually selectable. The mic/line card’s

input impedance shall be equivalent to the standard line level inputs of the mixer. The

matrix shall be capable of external DC controllers via digital I/O ports. The matrix shall be

capable of saving and restoring all settings in the event of a power failure.

The matrix shall be capable of accepting both AC and DC power supplies. The

frequency response of the matrix mixer shall be ± .5dB from 20Hz to 20kHz and +0, -3 from

10Hz to 30kHz. Crosstalk shall be better than -80dB. Crosspoint attenuation resolution shall

be .4dB per step. Input impedance shall be 20Kw balanced and 10Kw unbalanced with

a maximum level of +24dBV RMS. Output impedance shall be 220w unbalanced and

440w balanced, with a maximum level of +24dBV RMS.

Remotes Control modules for Matrix

The unit shall be wall-mounted for remotes function as convenient user interfaces for

paging, program source selection and volume control.

It shall be used for remote controls to conveniently interconnect in LAN bus topology. It

shall be possible to connect up to 128 remotes with one matrix mixer via ReO bus

communication.

The module shall be a digital remote control device designed for source selection or

page routing functions. Each remote has four momentary buttons and four

corresponding red status LEDs to indicate when a selection has been activated.

It shall be programmed to function as a paging station. In this mode, each of the

four buttons selects the room or zone to which a page will be routed. Multiple remotes

shall be be used if more than four destinations are required. LEDs indicate when a page

is successful, or blink to indicate a zone is already being paged into from another

location.

1.9 Tape Deck

The tape deck shall be multiple cassette players designed to provide continuos music

from up to two cassette decks. Each player shall accommodate up to two front loading

cassette decks.

The unit shall be of Digital processing system with 20 bit A/D and D/A converters, 2 auto

reverse cassette transports with rely play, Digital Noise Reduction, Normal/high speed

tape dubbing, Dolby HX Pro, Dolby B/C Noise reduction with built-in MPX filter.

The mainframe shall play both sides of each cassette before stepping on to the next. If

this deck is empty, or has been removed for service, the mainframe shall automatically

searches for the next available cassette module. The deck in use is indicated on the

mainframe front panel.

Each cassette deck module is equipped with LEDs indicating ‘tape loaded’ and ‘tape

direction’. Cassettes may be manually ejected by a push-button on each front panel.

The tape deck shall be from Pioneer or equal.

WOW and Flutter : 0.09%



MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 8 of 9

Frequency response : 20Hz –18,000Hz

Signal to Noise Ratio

Digital Noise Reduction : 90dB (with Dolby B/C NR)

Harmonic Distortion : 0.8% (-4dB)

4 digit electronic counter : 2

Power Consumption : 25W

1.10 CD Player

The CD player shall be multi-disc one to load a minimum of 6 discs into a magazine for

unrepeated play of 6 discs. It shall have 1 bit Direct Linear Conversion and D/A

converter, Full function remote control with 6 disc keys and power on/off, Magazine Hi-

Lite scan. The unit shall be from Pioneer or equal.

All discs could be played sequentially or randomly. The frequency response shall be 20-

20,000Hz, signal to noise ratio 98dB and total harmonic distortion shall be <.005%.

The dynamic range shall be 95 dB and power consumption of 12W. The unit shall be

supplied with a remote control.

The computer used for loading Matrix operating software shall be an IBM PC 2.0GHz,

128MB RAM, 40GB hard disk, 1.44MB floppy disk, 2 serial port, I parallel port, DVD ROM

mouse, keyboard etc. with Windows 98/2000 operating system.

1.11 Desk Top paging Microphone

Paging microphones shall be desk top type with provision for selecting up-to fifteen

zones. The microphone shall have cardioid response and shall be contoured for high

speed intelligibility. It shall have momentary push to talk buttons and busy indicator.

Impedance shall be 300 ohms floating.

1.12 Volume Control

Volume control shall be provided as shown on the drawings. It shall be stepped,

continuously rotating group volume controls with 6dB voltage steps and for control of

loads of appropriate speaker zones.

1.13 Music Override Unit

Music override units are to be provided as shown on the drawings for overriding any

local music being played on an emergency paging from the main amplifier rack. The

unit shall be suitable for installation on a single gang backbox and shall be of the same

finish as other electrical accessories.

1.14 Loudspeakers

Loudspeakers shall be installed in the areas to achieve a uniform sound pressure level.

The loudspeakers shall be mounted on walls, ceiling or in ground to meet the site

requirements.

All loudspeakers shall have 100V line transformer to match 100V amplifier outputs.



MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 9 of 9

The loudspeakers, including horns if used, shall provide music quality reproduction with a

frequency response upto at least 14,000Hz.

The specified power ratings of the speakers are the maximum values and no speaker is

expected to be tapped at the maximum rating. The speakers shall be Penton or equal.

1.15 Sound Projectors

The sound projectors shall be used for external areas where false ceiling not available. It

shall have a frequency response of 150 Hz-16 kHz and a maximum power rating of 15

watts.

The transformer shall have tappings of 15, 7.5, 4.0 and 0.8 watts at 100 volts. The SPL shall

be 95dB, 1watt,1m. and the dispersion angle shall be at least 150 deg.

The speakers shall be of weatherproof construction in aluminium alloy extruded body

and front grill shall be perforated aluminium, with fixing brackets for angled positioning.

Ceiling mounted Loudspeaker

The ceiling loudspeaker shall include a high compliance loudspeaker, 100 volt

transformer and steel construction.

The loudspeaker shall have a dispersion angle of 140 deg, a frequency response of 120

Hz-20kHz and a maximum power rating of 6 watts.

The transformer shall have power tapping of 6,.3,1.5, and 0.75 watts at 100 volts. The

directivity Q factor shall be 2.9 @ 1kHz.

Sound Pressure Level shall be 93dB @ 1m, 1watt and 104dB @ full power, 1m

The unit shall have a diameter of 189mm and be finished in white (RAL 9010) enamel.

Construction shall be of welded steel to prevent vibration and rattle.

The baffle shall utilise a torsion spring fixing for installation with either mounting ring or

protective enclosure (fire-dome) to suit the site requirement.


ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR

MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 1 of 11

SECTION 22

ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM



MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 2 of 11

SECTION 22

ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM

INDEX

1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2. SOFTWARE

3. PC REQUIREMENTS

4. INTELLIGENT CONTROL PANEL

5. CARD & READERS

6. BADGE/CARD PRINTER

7. MAGNETIC DOOR CONTACT

8. ELECTRIC LOCK, POWER TRANSFER & REMOTE RELEASE / REQUEST TO EXIT



MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 3 of 11


1. The contractor shall appoint a specialist subcontractor for the supply, installation,

testing and commissioning of an Online Access Control System as per the

requirement of the user. The specialist subcontractor shall carry out a

comprehensive training program for the security and maintenance personal of

the facility. The structure and contents of the training program shall be as

detailed in Section 1. The proposed products shall be supported by a local

distributor/installer with sufficient experience in the industry. Only the equipment

approved by the engineer, shall be delivered to site or installed. The system shall

include control panels, smart cards and card readers, magnetic door contacts

and magnetic locks as indicated on the drawings. The system shall include any

additional accessories or parts those are not indicated on this specifications and

drawings required to form a fully operational system to the satisfaction of the

engineers.

The system shall include proximity cards and proximity readers as indicated on

the drawings.

2. Different control panel configurations for one, two, four, six and eight doors shall

be available to allow various combinations of card/card reader or keypad

inputs, relay outputs, and alarm inputs to maximize system hardware flexibility.

Panels can be combined to provide the exact number of inputs and outputs

required for each application. All panels shall support a fully distributed

architecture with all real-time processing done at each panel.

3. The Access Control System shall provide the following minimum features:

a) Instant response to Card Read within 0.25 seconds and reporting on

access control monitoring within 2.0 seconds.

b) No degradation of system performance in case of a communication loss.

All time zones access levels, and holiday schedule shall remain

operational on such occasion.

c) No loss of transaction for system history flues. All panels automatically shall

switch to buffer mode, capable of storing 10,000+ events per panel.

d) Each panel shall represent one "Intelligent Controller" in the distributed

processing network. Each Controller shall use an Intel 80C88

microprocessor as its engine.

e) Information shall be downloadable to the panels using either a PC or LAN

network. A Computer shall not be necessary for panel operation and

may be taken off-line if required, once the system information has been

downloaded to the panels.

For basic system requirements a PC shall simply be used as a Terminal or

Window into the System, History Data Logging Device and Data

Manager.

4. All panels shall have a built-in reset timer (watchdog circuit) that automatically

reboots the panel in the event that the processor is interrupted by a transient



MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 4 of 11

surge. When a system processor is reset, it shall automatically request a

parameter down load from the Master panel and reboot to its proper working

state. If the Master panel is reset, it shall automatically request a parameter

download from the PC or LAN. When the Master is a modem location, it shall

automatically dial the PC or LAN, via modem, and receive the parameter

downloaded.

5. The doors shall operate Fail safe/Fail Secure as per Engineers requirements on

site. Refer door hardware schedule in Architectural Specification for a

comprehensive list of doors to be provided with security / access control devices.

The complete scope of work shall include all locations listed in the schedule and

/ or shown on drawings.

6. The Contractor shall coordinate the location with the door schedule prepared by

the Main Consultant.

7. The specialist Contractor shall take into consideration of latest Dubai Police

requirements and include the same in as part of contract.

2.0 SOFTWARE

1. The access control systems PC or LAN application software shall be a true 32-bit

access control software that utilizing a Windows 2000 or NT operating system and

combining point monitoring, control with integral Photo I.D. Badging, Guard Tour,

Time and Attendance, Alarm Graphics and system integration (interfacing) for

CCTV, BMS, Fire, etc. The application software shall be capable of running on

either a single PC or on a multi-user Local Area Network.

2. TCP/IP network communications shall be utilized to provide user interaction and

real-time monitoring to workstations or PC's located anywhere on a LAN or WAN.

The software shall be password word protected to allow for operator specific

capabilities at each workstation. The access control system application software

shall incorporate Point and Click operation with hierarchical tree views and pop

up menus for ease of use. I/O monitoring and control shall be achieved through

animated icons that depict the real-time status of each input or output. The

software shall also allow I/O points to be assigned to an Override Group, allowing

for multiple inputs and outputs to be monitored and controlled via a single icon.

3. The access control system application software shall have the ability to support

and configure Graphic alarm maps and will provide detailed information

regarding any I/O point within the system. The graphic maps will display real-time

status of each I/O point and will allow the system operator to perform manual

overrides directly from the map.

4. Photo I.D. Badging shall be integral feature of the access control application

software. The system shall have the ability to import card holder images from a

file, capture images from a live video source, or work with any device providing

a TWAIN interface. The application software shall have the ability to print and

store multiple images. Automatic Image Recall and Verification upon card use

shall be an integral feature of the access control Windows 2000/NT application

software. The software must support signature pads, finger print scanners, bar

code and magnetic stripe encoding. A suitable Card printer using latest

technologies shall be supplied with the system, including camera, tripod, video

capture card etc.



MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 5 of 11

5. The access control application software shall have the ability to create badge

templates by using drag and drop tools and shall incorporate features such as,

transparent backgrounds, image ghosting, text centering, text shrink to fit, bring

to front, send to back, layering and rotation to any degree. The software shall

also have the ability to create unlimited badge templates, allowing multiple

departments and user groups to have unique badges. The software shall support

single or two-sided color or black and white badges and will permit either one

time or batch process printing.

6. The access control application software shall have flexible linking capabilities

that allow for any card, input or output in any location throughout the distributed

network to link (interlock) with any other input or output within that location. The

creation of mantraps shall be a matter of software programming and will require

no additional hardware.

7. The access control application software shall provide the ability to create simple

or extensive Custom History Reports. The report function shall allow the operator

to define reports by cardholder, input, output, events or any combination of

these items.

8. The access control application software shall be fully year 2000 compliant.

3.0 PC REQUIREMENTS

1. CPU Minimum : Pentium IV – 3.2GHz (or better) - Host PC for single PC,

single location system, or LAN workstation for single

location system.

2. Operating System : Windows 2000 or NT Workstation Version 4.0 (or higher)

Service Pack 3 or greater if required. Service Pack 3 shall

be included with the Access Control System application

software CD. Windows NT Server is required for system with

5 or more workstations.

3. Memory : 256 MB of memory for File Server or Comm. Server shall be

available.

4. Drives : Application software shall be provided on CD only. History

archives and database backups performed in the

software will utilize the floppy drive or other specified

target drive.

5. Drives : One Floppy Drive 3.5", 1.44M

One CD-RW Drive 16x speeds (or better)

6. Hard Disk : 80 Gigabyte Hard Disk (or better).

7. Monitors : 19-inch Color monitor, LCD.

8. Local Area Network : Windows 2000/NT Workstation Version 4.0 or higher with

Service Pack 3 (or greater). Windows NT Server is required

for 5 or more Workstations. 10 Mbit (or better) LAN card is

required. LAN adapter Card 100Mbit (or better) adapter



MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 6 of 11

card. 10/100 base T. TCP / IP - protocol must be loaded

even if there is no LAN.

9. Serial Ports : Two Serial Ports

4.0 INTELLIGENT CONTROL PANEL

The Intelligent Controller Panel (ICP) unit shall have the following specifications:

1. 9600 Baud - Dial-up / 38400 Direct

2. 150 + Card, Reader and Keypad Formats

3. Flexible I/O Linking

4. Removable Terminal Blocks

5. Supports 4 State Input Monitoring

6. UL 294 Listed and CE approved

7. Each ICP unit shall be comprised of a processor and an I/O-termination board.

This combination will form an Intelligent Controller Panel (ICP). The ICP shall

contain an 80C88 processor and RAM chips. The I/O portion shall contain the

power supply and field wiring terminals.

8. The ICP shall be capable of operating as a fully distributed processing control

panel that retains all data necessary for system operation in its own RAM. The ICP

shall have the ability to check its database and make decisions about output

control, alarm monitoring and time zone changes. The ICP shall have an integral

real-time clock that allows all time zone events to continue even when PC

communications are not available.

9. The ICP unit shall have the ability to be programmed as either a Master or Slave

in a distributed network. A dipswitch selection feature within the ICP shall

determine the Master or Slave mode of operation. The first ICP of each location

shall be designated as the Master. The Master panel will have the ability to

communicate with PC, LAN and Slave panels simultaneously.

10. Communications between ICP Master panels and a host PC or LAN shall be via

RS-232. The ICP manufacturer shall provide fully integrated Windows NT/2000

network compatible system operating software, for the purpose of controlling the

ICP network through a Local Area Network (LAN).

11. The ICP unit shall have 16 E.O.L. supervised inputs for point monitoring. The input

shall have a status LED to indicate electrical status regardless of the armed state.

The inputs on the ICP shall support two; three and four state monitoring, with five

input configurations to choose from. Inputs configured for three and four state

circuits shall support trouble reports.

12. The ICP unit shall be compatible with Wiegand, Barium Ferrite, Proximity, Bar

Code, Magnetic Stripe, Biometrics and Smart Card readers and shall allow any



MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 7 of 11

combination of reader technologies to be used in the same system. The ICP unit

shall allow keypads to be added with readers in order to create a card and PIN

controlled entry point.

13. There shall be a highly flexible and extensive Programmable-linking feature that

allows an input to link to other inputs or to outputs. The Programmable Linking

feature shall also allow outputs to link to other outputs or to input. The ICP unit

shall also provide the ability of assigning access codes to link to either inputs or

outputs or both. The Linking feature shall allow the ICP to be used for a multitude

of applications including Floor Select Elevator Control, HVAC Control and Alarm

Annunciation and Control.

14. The ICP unit shall have a standard configuration of 64K of ROM and 64K of RAM.

The RAM memory allocation shall be dynamic and set for optimum use by the

Host PC, or LAN operator according to the data entered for each location. The

RAM memory shall be expandable from 64K up to 192K by adding up to four 32K

RAM chips.

15. The Pre-Warn Output of the ICP unit shall be used to indicate the controlled door

is being held open and about to go into alarm.

19. Temperature Operating 32 to 131 F

Storage -35 to 150 F

20. Humidity Operating 0 to 95%, relative

21. Supply Voltage Panel Voltage 16.5 VAC 40VA

AUX DC Voltage 12-24 VAC 40VA

Power Requirements 33 Watts (.031 BTU)

Panel Current Draw 550 ma

22. Output Voltage Panel outputs shall provide a regulated voltage. The AUX

DC output provides an unregulated voltage from the AUX

AC supply voltage.

Panel Output – 1 12VDC 1A Fused

Panel Output – 2 9 VDC 300ma current limited

Panel Output – 3 5 VDC 300ma Fused

Panel Output – 4 12-24 VDC 3A Fused

23. Inputs EOL Supervised 16

Inputs 7 and 8 shall be used for the door position switch and exit request unless

otherwise programmed. All Inputs support two, three and four state monitoring

and five programmable circuit types.

24. Outputs Form C Relays 8

Relay Output Ratings 5 Amp 24 VDC / 5Amp 115VAC

LED Outputs 6 - 3 per reader

Pre-Warn Outputs 2 - 1 per door

25. Controlled Entry Points Two Card Reader or Keypad

26. Charging Output Trickle Charge 13.5 VDC 500ma Fused



MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 8 of 11

27. Standby time ICP unit under Maximum Load shall be 3.25 hours.

The ICP shall tests the integrity of the Battery once every 24 hours.

28. Comm. Ports RS-232 Port 1 Master Comm., Modem or direct

RS-485 In 2 One for Master, One for Slave

RS-485 Out 1 For Subsequent Slaves

29. I/O Extender 1 No. for expansion of Inputs or Outputs

30. Processor Intel 80C88 or V20 8Mhz

31. RAM Memory Standard 64K

Expandable to 192K

32. The transaction buffer shall automatically adjust to use any RAM not allocated for

system parameters. Upon completion of a download from PC or LAN to a Master

ICP, the Event Buffer size is reported to the PC or LAN and displayed on the

Monitor Screen(s).

33. ICP Packaging The ICP unit shall be supplied complete with Processor Board, I/O

board, Ribbon Cable, 16 EOL Resistors, Enclosure, Lock and

Key, Wiring Label, Anchors and Wire Ties, Tamper Switch,

and an External AC Power Indicator.

5.0 CARD & READERS

1. ACCESS CARD

a. Contact less, multiple applications ISO credit card size card with high-speed

read/write (106 kbits/s) and data exchange with the reader as specified in ISO

7816 shall be used in the system.

b. The cards shall be plain white, wiegand encoded, gloss finish on both sides and

shall be directly printable on both sides.

c. The read distance of the cards using relevant proximity reader shall be upto 10

cms, with fast transaction time of less than 100 ms.

d. Cards shall be constructed of laminated PVC, with data retention on

temperature range of –25 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C.

e. 300 nos. cards to be supplied with Video badging.

2. PROXIMITY CARD READER

1. The system shall be equipped with proximity card readers with keypad and a

tamper switch as shown on the drawings. It shall be possible to use different types

of cards/readers in the system.

2. The Proximity Reader shall be a Uni-Directional Indoor or Outdoor unit designed

for mounting on any surface including solid metal. The reader can be mounted

behind most building materials such as sheet rock, or it can be mounted with its



MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 9 of 11

side against a metal door or window frame. This unit shall have a read range of

more than six cms.

3. The Proximity Reader shall be a unitized reader with a standard Wiegand output

that connects directly to the access control panel without the use of an interface

module. The reader shall be designed to work with any HID proximity cards.

4. The card reader shall read the encoded data from the access card and/or

transponder and transmit the data back to the host panel, giving an audible and

visual indication of a properly read card and shall have a hold line that will buffer

a card read until the panel has asserted that the information can be sent up line.

5. The card reader shall have a re-present mode in which the card must be taken

from the reader field for one second before being read again. This feature is

required to prevent multiple reads from a single card presentation

The reader shall be powered from the access control panel (ICP) directly.

Warranty Lifetime warranty

Color Black

Construction Polycarbonate

Operating Voltage 10 to 15 VDC

Indications Bi color Green/Red, Amber LED and audible tone

Temperature -30 to +65 Deg C

Humidity 5 -95%, relative (indoor models)

Cable Requirements Seven conductor 22 AWG shielded

Reader Distance Maximum 150 Mtrs. From the Panel

Standards FCC and CE

Size 5.25" x 2.75" x 1.375"

6. The card reader shall have the following reader configuration options:

A. Reader beeps and flashes green on a card read, LED normally red, single line

control of LED.

B. Reader flashes green on a card read, LED normally red, single line control of LED.

C. Reader beeps on a card read, LED normally red, single line control of LED.

D. Reader beeps and flashes green on a card read, LED normally off, red and green

LED's controlled individually.

E. Reader flashes green on a card read, LED normally off, red and green LED's

controlled individually.



MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 10 of 11

F. Reader beeps on a card read, LED normally off, red and green LED's controlled

individually.

G. Beeper and LED are controlled by host only, LED normally off, red and green LED

controlled individually.

6.0 BADGE/CARD PRINTER

1. Card/badge printer to direct graphic print the cards with necessary software,

camera, tripod and scanner shall be provided with the system including supplies

for printing 1000 cards. The card printer shall be with following minimum

specifications.

Print Method: Dye-Sublimation/Resin Thermal Transfer

Resolution: 300 dpi (11.8 dots/mm)

Colors: Up to 16.7 million

Print Ribbon: Full color with resin black, YMCKO

Print Speed: 8 seconds per card / 450 cards per hour

35 seconds per card / 102 cards per hour

Accepted Standard Card

Sizes:

CR-80 (3.375” x 2.125” / 85.6mm x 54mm)

CR-90 (3.63” x 2.37” / 92mm x 60mm)

Maximum Print Area: 3.37”L x 2.14”W / 85.5mmL x 54.5mmW

Maximum Card Width

Range:

2.1" to 2.63" / 53mm to 67mm

Maximum Card Length

Range:

3.25" to 3.625" / 82mm to 92mm

Maximum Card Thickness: .010" to .060" / .254mm to 1.5mm

Card Types: PVC or polyester cards with polished PVC finish.

Card Capacity: 100 cards (.030") or 300 cards (.010"); auto or manual

feed

Display: LCD display shows printer status and diagnostic error

prompts

Software Drivers: Windows® 3.1x and Windows 95/98; Windows NT and

Macintosh®

Interface: Standard 8-bit parallel (ECP compatible) or Macintosh

serial; network compatible

Operating Temperature: 65° to 80° F / 18° to 27° C

Humidity: 20-80% non-condensing

Dimensions: 8.4"H x 13.6"W x 12.7"D / 213mmH x 345mmW x

323mmD

Weight: 16.3 lbs. / 7.4kg

Agency Listings: Safety: UL 1950, CSA C2.2 and TüV-GS (IEC-950)

Emissions: FCC Class B, CRC c1374, Class B and TüV-



MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 11 of 11

EMC (IEC-801 -2, -3, -4; CISPR 22, Class B), CE

Supply Voltage: 100-240 VAC, 2A

Supply Frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz

Options: * USB Interface Cable

* Ethernet Interface Adapter

7.0 MAGNETIC DOOR CONTACT

Magnetic door contacts shall be provided on all doors equipped with the access

control system and the doors indicated in the drawing and listed in the door hardware

schedule to monitor the door status. It shall be possible to arm and disarm the doors to

be monitored manually or using the time zones in the system. The door contacts shall

meet following minimum specifications:

Contact Type: SPST, Gold under plating and deactivated Rhodium outer

plating

Switch Cycles: 50 Million

Operation Gap: One Inch

Colors: White, Brown, Grey

Construction: Weatherproof, high impact ABS plastic

Rating: 0.1 Amp/100 VDC

Temperature: -25 Deg. C to 70 Deg. C

8.0 ELECTRIC LOCK, POWER TRANSFER & REMOTE RELEASE / REQUEST TO EXIT

The system shall be complete with electric locks, power transfer and remote release /

request to exit push buttons located as shown on drawings and as listed in the door

hardware schedule.

Electromagnetic door holders shall be provided as part of Fire Alarm System for Fire

doors as shown on drawings and as listed in the door hardware schedule.

Automatic sliding doors shall be provided as detailed in Architectural Specification.

Wherever required, kick switches shall be provided to operate sliding doors.

All doors provided with Access Control System and all automatic sliding doors shall be

interlocked with fire alarm system.


IP TV SYSTEM

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 23

IP TV SYSTEM


IP TV SYSTEM

Page 2 of 4

SECTION 23

IP TV SYSTEM

INDEX



IP TV SYSTEM

Page 3 of 4


1.1 General

Compliance with sections of Division I, General and documents referred to therein.

The contractor shall supply, install, test and commission a Internet Protocol Television

System for distribution of digital television channels coming from 3 satellites specified by

transport streaming through IP and packet switched network to all outlet points

indicated in the drawing. The primary system equipment and components shall be

installed by a specialist sub contractor and is to be approved by the Resident Engineer

in accordance with the specifications as listed in this document.

The IPTV system supplier / installer shall be a specialist and has such trained technicians

for engineering assistance, installation and maintenance of the equipment. All of the

equipment or components for the system installed shall be from the same manufacturer,

except for items not included in their manufacturing range. Items not included in the

range of manufacturer shall be proposed to and be separately approved by engineer.

The system shall be capable of providing television reception of all local, neighboring,

and international channels broadcasted and receivable in this area.

3. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The IPTV system is based on the principle that the IP streamers are DVB to IP gateways

designed to broadcast in multicast on IP network, the services (TV or Radio programs)

issued from digital satellite, terrestrial or cable reception, or from professional DVB

equipment.

The streamers shall be modular construction as to allow for easy upgrading and adding

of future channels and fully compatible with analog and digital transmission technology.

The streamers modules shall have two directionally coupled input ports that facilitate

simple connection of the incoming signal using the plug bridges. For power connection

each module has two DC banana sockets that allow to build the +12 Vdc cascade from

the power supply module. A third banana socket is available to connect the power for

the attached LNB.

The equipment shall be housed in a weatherproof, lockable cabinet, allowing for

sufficient ventilation, preferably being located in a climate-controlled environment.

A. IP Streaming Module

The specification of the IP streaming device module shall be as follows:-

Input : 1 DVB transport stream (MPTS)

Output : up to 8 simultaneous IP-encapsulated programs with individual multicast

address

Filtering of information contained in the MPEG-2 tables

UDP and RTP transmission protocols

Web interface for module configuration

SAP and SDP protocols to facilitate automatic program selection in the set-top box and

to provide program information to external servers

PID filtering


IP TV SYSTEM

Page 4 of 4

PSI/SI parsing

ECM and EMM transparent pass through

Regeneration or blockade of CAT, NIT, SDT, EIT and TDT tables

QoS marking configurable

TTL configurable

DVB-S to IP Streamer

Input

Section

(QPSK)

Frequency Range 950 - 2150 MHz

Input Level -65 … -25 dBm

Input Symbol Rate 2 … 45 MS/s

Output

Section

(IP)

Standard IEEE 802.3 10/100 BaseT

Bit Rate up to 100 Mbps

Transmission Protocol UDP/RTP

No. of simultaneous

streams up to 8

Multicast Yes

Connectors

Configuration RS 232 / DB-9

Ethernet Output RJ-45

General

Supply Voltage +12 Vdc

Operating

temperature 0 … +45 ºC

Configuration and setting of the streamers shall be carried out through a web browser

running on a PC provided with Ethernet adapter.

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL

PART B - SECTION 24

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM

Page 1 of 10

SECTION 24

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL

PART B - SECTION 24

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM

Page 2 of 10

INDEX


AL TADAWI HOSPITAL

PART B - SECTION 24

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM

Page 3 of 10


1.1 Description of Work

The contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and maintain during warranty period

the complete mobile radio system as specified herein for the hotel and serviced

apartment buildings.

The system shall be of the latest state of art technology in digital mobile radio system

and shall be based on DECT( Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication)

technology or equivalent. Scope of work shall include the supply, installation, testing,

and commissioning of the whole system including but not limited to the following:

a) 30 nos indoor 6 channel base stations

b) 15 nos. outdoor 6 channel base stations

c) PC based management system for the subscription of the mobile phones and

programming the features.

d) Interface to the Property Management System

e) PC based Text messaging system

f) 80 Mobile Handsets

g) All related control, communication and power cabling, accessories and

terminations.

No. of base stations mentioned above are only indicative. Actual no. of base stations

shall be decided by the contractor based on a detailed site survey with all the required

advanced equipment. Contractor shall conduct the site survey and provide the

required no. of base stations at strategic locations to obtain complete coverage of the

area to consultant approval.

The contractor shall negotiate the necessary application for frequency allocation with

Ministry of Communication and shall be responsible to pay all the necessary charges to

Ministry of Communication.

The system should defines a Common Interface (CI) for equipment (between the Fixed

network part and the portable part)

The system supports both the Public Access Protocol (PAP), which has some proprietary

aspects and the Generic Access Protocol (GAP), which secures compatibility of the

system equipment of different suppliers for basic speech call. The latter allows the users

freedom of choice for the portable terminal equipment.

System should have micro-cellular system, which means that the system makes use of a

network of radios with a low transmitter power (250 MW). A cordless extension must be

registered by the system before it can be used to make or receive calls. This registration

process is called subscription. Subscription to the system requires a Personal Identification

Number (PIN) allocated by the Communications manager. Once subscribed the

extension can be temporarily removed, or blacklisted if required.

The cordless extension monitors the quality of the radio link during a call. If the

interference on a certain carrier (frequency) and timeslot causes problems, it should

switch to another frequency at that same base station. This is called intra-cell hand over.

This hand over procedure requires that the connection can be supported on 2 channels

simultaneously, for a while, to allow a "seamless hand over". So, first, the handset selects

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL

PART B - SECTION 24

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM

Page 4 of 10

a new (interference free) channel and sets up a connection via that channel, while the

old channel is still in use. Secondly, the old channel is disconnected. The user will not

notice anything of the hand over. If the mobile user roams from one cell to another,

during the conversation, he will probably go out of range of the first radio and into the

range of the second. In that case, if the quality of the transmission requires it, the radio

link will switch over to the new radio. This is called inter-cell hand over, which will also be

seamless.

1.2 Continuous Dynamic Channel Selection

The system handset should continuously monitor its environment and autonomously

selects the best frequency, timeslot and base station. This selection and possible change

should be unnoticeable for the user, when moving through the system network and

during a call. This process is called Continuous Dynamic Channel Selection (CDCS) .Due

to this CDCS process cells may overlap and no frequency planning is required, as is the

case for many other types of cellular systems.

Speech communication between handsets should be encrypted (or scrambled)

If a cordless telephone set is lost or stolen it should be possible for the communications

manager to blacklist the set. This means that can no longer be used within the DECT

area.

1.3 Frequencies and Timeslots

System should pirate in a frequency range of 1880 - 1890 MHz. There are ten carriers

defined and in each carrier 12 full duplex (12 up link + 12 down link) time slots. This allows

120 full duplex channels in the air. Frequencies and time slots are re-used in the covered

area and dynamically selected, so the maximum number of available channels always

high enough even in high traffic density areas. Due to the maximum number of duplex

time slots, the maximum number of simultaneous connections per RFP should be 6 or 12.

1.4 Radio Base-Stations

With a radio base station a radio environment (cell) is created in which the portable

telephone can operate. The radio base station should provide the air interface between

the fixed network and the portables.

The RFP is the radio base station or the Transceiver for the radio signals. The following

should be made available:

Indoor RFP that can handle a maximum of 6 simultaneous calls (6 channel RFP).

Indoor RFP that can handle a maximum of 12 simultaneous calls (12 channel

RFP).

If required Directional Antennas should be used to cover the required range.

1.5 PP (Portable Part)

The Portable Part of the system handset should be delivered with the iS Mobile system

comply with the GAP (Generic Access Profile), ETS 300 175 agreements.

1.6 Base Station

The Base Station should supports the following features

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL

PART B - SECTION 24

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM

Page 5 of 10

a) Supports DECT GAP compatible handsets

b) 10/100 Mbits Ethernet interface

c) Full non-blind slot radio

d) Secure DECT encryption

e) Support of G.729ab for compression, silence suppression and comfort noise

insertion

f) Roaming and seamless handovers.

g) LRMS messaging (max. 160 characters)

h) CLIP and Name display

i) Overlap sending

j) Enquiry

k) DTMF and call progress tones

l) Message waiting indication

m) Downloadable software

n) Plug-and-play installation

o) Flexible assignment of channels

1.7 Environmental Conditions

ETS 300 019-1-3, temperature range:

Storage class 1.2 (–25° C to +60° C)

Transport class 2.3 (–40°C to +70° C)

Operation class 3.1 (0° C to +60°C)

With optional outdoor box:

Operation class 3.3 (–20° C to +50°C)

Relative humidity < 90 % (non condensing)

1.8 Safety

- EN60950-1:2001

- EN50385

- Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC)

- EN301489-1 and 6

- EN61000-3-2/3 (AC supply)

- DECT

- EN301406 V1.4.1: 2001-03

- EN300757 (Service class 2)

1.9 Reliability

- MTBF < 4600 FIT (Failure In Time)

- Technical lifetime > 7 years

1.10 Hand Sets

Type- I (10 Nos.)

Handsets carry a CE mark and conform to:

- EMC: EN301 489-1, EN 301 489-6

- EMF: EN50360

- Radio: EN301406

- Telecom: TBR10, TBR22

- Safety: EN60950-1

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL

PART B - SECTION 24

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM

Page 6 of 10

The graphic LCD (96 x 60 pixels) features a single icon (head) line, three text lines of 16

characters and a soft key line.

Light, slim-line, ergonomic design

H Up to 20 hours calling time

H 200 hours stand-by time

H Loudspeaker mode for hands-free operation (with indicator)

H Built-in vibrator for silent alert

H Illuminated display and keypad

H Personal phone book (100 entries of

H 16 characters and 32 digits)

H CLI (name & number) support

H Pre-dial number preparation/correction

H Caller log (last 30 calls answered, missed, rejected or filtered, including date/time

stamp)

H 20-number redial

H Incoming call filter (10)

H Quick call (9 numbers)

H Alphanumeric messaging (LRMS)

H Multiple subscriptions (10) with automatic/manual selection

H Ringer melodies (30) with individual melodies for all alerts

H Adjustable ringer volume (8 settings)

H Adjustable earpiece, loudspeaker and headset volume (8 settings)

H Multiple menu languages (12)

H Recall/hold (PBX enquiry)

H Call-reject option

H SOS key

H Microphone mute

H Keypad lock

H Silent charging

H Auto answer

H Automatic encryption for secure calls

H Easy menu programming

H Alarm (watch) function

H Date & time display

H Call-duration display

H Date/time stamp on logged calls and received messages

H Headset connection with hook switch in cable (standard 2.5 mm plug)

H Standard rechargeable batteries (3x AAA 1.2V/800mAh NiMH)

H Removable belt clip

H Chargers

TYPE-II (20 Nos.)


- EMC: EN301 489-1, EN301 489-6

- EMF: EN50360

- Radio: EN301406

- Telecom: TBR10

- Safety: EN 60950-1

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL

PART B - SECTION 24

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM

Page 7 of 10

The graphic LCD (96x33 pixels) features a single icon (head) line, one text line of 16

characters and a soft key line:

- Adjustable ringer volume (7 settings)

- Adjustable earpiece and loudspeaker volume (7 settings)

- Auto answer when lifting from charger

- Automatic encryption for secure calls

- Call-reject option

- Caller log (last 20 calls answered, missed or rejected)

- CLI (name & number) support

- Easy menu programming

- GAP/CAP compatible

- 200 hours stand-by time

- Illuminated display

- Keypad lock

- Last-number redial (10)

- Light, slim-line ergonomic design

- Loudspeaker mode for hands-free operation (with indication)

- Microphone mute

- Multiple menu languages (12)

- Multiple subscriptions (5) with automatic/manual selection

- On-hook number preparation with correction option

- Personal phone book (50 entries with 16 characters and 32 digits)

- Provides crystal clear voice quality and seamless handover

- Quick call (9 numbers)

- Recall/ hold (PBX enquiry)

- Removable belt clip

- Ringer melodies (10) with individual ringer melodies for all alerts

- Silent charging

- SOS key

- Standard rechargeable batteries (3x AAA 1.2V/800mAh NiMH)

- Up to 20 hours talk time

TYPE-III (70 Nos.)


- EMC: EN301 489-1, EN301 489-6

- EMF: EN50360

- Radio: EN301406

- Telecom: TBR10

- Safety: EN 60950-1

Dust and water proof to IP 54.

The graphic LCD (96x33 pixels) features a single icon (head) line, four text line of 16

characters:

- Adjustable ringer volume (8 settings)

- Adjustable earpiece and loudspeaker volume (8 settings)

- Auto answer when lifting from charger

- Automatic encryption for secure calls

- Call-reject option

- Caller log (last 30 calls answered, missed or rejected)

- CLI (name & number) support

- Easy menu programming

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL

PART B - SECTION 24

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM

Page 8 of 10

- GAP/CAP compatible

- 100 hours stand-by time

- Illuminated display

- Keypad lock

- Last-number redial (10)

- Robust design

- Loudspeaker mode for hands-free operation (with indication)

- Microphone mute

- Multiple menu languages (12)

- Multiple subscriptions (5) with automatic/manual selection

- On-hook number preparation with correction option

- Personal phone book (100 entries with 16 characters and 32 digits)

- Provides crystal clear voice quality and seamless handover

- Quick call (9 numbers)

- Recall/ hold (PBX enquiry)

- Removable belt clip

- Ringer melodies (10) with individual ringer melodies for all alerts

- Silent charging

- SOS key

- Standard rechargeable batteries (3x AAA 1.2V/800mAh NiMH)

- Up to 7 hours talk time

- Chargers

1.11 Text Messaging System

System should supports the following

DECT E2 Messages (up to 160 characters) supports up to 160 characters, the

DECT equipment and/or the handset may limit this to 128 or even 48 characters.

If the handset supports only 48 characters, the message can be chopped and

sent in parts to the handset.

Sending messages to the Digital extensions telephone of the PABX or DECT

extensions during ringing and in call connect status.

Message length can specified per device type. Also if messages are to long to

be displayed, they can be chopped into parts that can be displayed.

SMS messages to Cell phones.

The System should send SMS messages to cell phones. The interface to the Cell

Phone provider can be a modem or special box that behaves like a real cell

phone with SIM card.

This option is mainly used as alternative device. If a message to a DECT handset is

not acknowledged, the message can be forwarded to a cell phone.

E-mail messages.

E-mails can be sent via SMTP to any E-mail server. The E-mail contains the

message that needs to be sent.

Digital output to control relays or similar equipment.

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL

PART B - SECTION 24

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM

Page 9 of 10

The relay contacts can be use to control e.g. door-contacts, hooters in case of

an alarm or lamps. Contacts are specifically used as alternative device

(overflow) , in case a message is not confirmed.

ESPA 4.4.4 pager protocol. The System should send pager messages to paging

equipment using the ESPA 4.4.4 protocol.

The System should consist of separate modules. There are three main groups of

Modules:

- Core software Modules

- Input and Output Modules

- Security modules

1.12 Message Handling Functions

- Conditional messages

- Flexible call-cycle definition

- Free message input

- Group nesting

- Individual calendar function

- Manual messages from operator

- Manual messaging

- Message chopping (for very long messages)

- Message confirmation (LRMS, urgent)

- Message destinations based on working hours and holidays

- Message diversion

- Message overflow on non-receipt

- Message urgency levels: normal, urgent and very urgent.

- Messaging to groups

- Messaging to individuals

- Messaging via web access

- Outstanding alarm confirmation, by dialing the PBX (CLI or PIN)

- Pre-programmed messages

- Priority queuing

- Repeat message sending

- Script messages for emergency situations

- Timed messages

- Week calendar function

1.13 Alarm Sending Functions

- Connect external alarm systems as output

- Dynamic destination (depending on message length)

- GSM or WAN paging

- Location indication in alarm messages

- Message division over several display lines

- Message scroll on display

- Messages in outgoing e-mails

- Message queuing for SMS

- Protocol support (on request)

- Provider access

- Short messages linked in groups

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL

PART B - SECTION 24

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM

Page 10 of 10

- SMS confirmation via CLID

- SMS confirmation via DTMF/PIN

- To external GSM phones

- To internal analogue and digital sets (user-to-user)

- To LRMS/DECT handsets

- To Messenger @ Net application from DECT LRMS handset

- To non-LRMS/DECT handsets (user-to-user)

- To third-party applications using ESPA 4.4.4

Messenger @ Net Alarm capture Functions

- Alarms generated by calling a predefined extension number.

- Alarms initiated based on incoming e-mails

- Alarms initiated based on incoming voice calls (CLID)

- Alarms set, reset and confirmed based on inbound calls

- Connections to contacts: physical contacts (NO, NC, pulse), voltage and

current sensor inputs, or digital

- E-mail confirmation of acceptance or rejection

- Play pre-recorded voice messages

- Reset alarms based on input from hardware contacts

- Set up a call to a device and play a wav file linked to a specific alarm

- Various protocols supported on a serial interface (refer to detailed

protocol list)

- Via ESPA 4.4.4 interface

- Via Ethernet TCP/IP

- Via serial interface

- Via SNMP

Electrical Specification

Documents

b section

lighting section

earthing section

fittings section

detection system section

ups system section

system of wiring section

general requirements